Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

If the length of the elevation is changed. In this case. and customize the project as necessary. 12 Select DefaultMetric. quantities. schedules. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the floor or roof remains connected. the parameter is one of association or connection. how to navigate the user interface. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. drawing sheets. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. sections. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. you will use the default template. drawings. review the Revit Architecture templates. 2D and 3D view. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the operation of the software is parametric.rte. the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. 13 Click OK. In the Revit Architecture model. and residential. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. In this case. You learn the terminology. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and click Open. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. and phases when you need it. every drawing sheet. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. If you move the partition. click Training Files. the hierarchy of elements. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. and open Metric\Templates.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and schedules required for a building project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. scope. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. construction. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and plans. hence. For most tutorial projects.

and keynotes are annotation elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . and 2D detail components. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and reference planes are datum elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. They help to describe or document the model. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. programming is not required. dimensions. Examples include detail lines. levels.When you change something. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. windows. walls. grids. For example. windows. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. doors. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. For example. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. filled regions. They display in relevant views of the model. Datum elements help to define project context. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and cabinets are model components. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. If you can draw. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and roofs are model elements. tags. walls and roofs are hosts. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. dimensions. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. doors.

first floor. families. for example. or bottom of foundation. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Most often. views of the project. To place levels. Often. This information includes components used to design the model. and drawings of the design. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and ceilings. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.In Revit Architecture. In other cases. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. for example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. such as roofs. you do nothing to establish these relationships. top of wall. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. section views. floors. elevation views. and so forth). from geometry to construction data. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and types. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. schedules. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit Architecture. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. By using a single project file. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. you can explicitly control them. The project file contains all information for the building design. However.

A type can also be a style. A type can be a specific size of a family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ceilings. the user interface is labeled. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. specifically its clear user interface. However. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). dimensions. roofs. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. In the following illustration. For example. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. making it easy to understand what each button represents. For example. floors. identical use. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . ■ Type: Each family can have several types. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. In the steps that follow. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. and similar graphical representation. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. and levels. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. System families include walls. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. categories of model elements include walls and beams.

In addition. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. This creates a new project based on the default template. By default. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

which are listed on the menu. and View. For example. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Edit. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . The toolbar buttons represent common commands. While working in the drawing area. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.

when you add a door. On the left side of the Options Bar. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. For example. When you select the Door tool. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. a door type is specified. 9 In the Type Selector. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model.

containing buttons grouped by function. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. In the drawing area. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

click the tab in the Design Bar. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.11 Click OK. select Views (all). In the Project Browser.

To open a view. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. family category (doors. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and group name. delete. and rename views. families. 3D). so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. reports. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. schedules. windows). Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. families. double-click its name.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. walls. and groups. sheets. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. The browser is dockable. elevations.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. In this case. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Cancel. After creating a browser organization scheme. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The cursor displays as a pencil. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Wall. In the bottom left corner of the window. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.

You can also press SHIFT+F1. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. click on the Standard toolbar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. click Modify to end the Wall command. The status bar also provides information. In addition. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. 20 Press TAB. Windows: From any window. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. In the status bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. If no Help button displays. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. You can use this tri-pane. press F1 for help. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. find a keyword on the Index tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. in conjunction with tooltips. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Tooltips: To see tooltips. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. There are several tools that help you find information. Click the Help button. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. It highlights when the cursor is over it. regarding selected elements in a view. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. press F1 for context-sensitive help. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. When you place the cursor over an element. You can select a topic on the Contents tab.18 On the Design Bar.

rvt. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. In the following steps. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms out from the building model.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. For example. 5 On the View toolbar. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. In the drawing area.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. on the View toolbar. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. To modify or add snap increments. NOTE As you zoom in and out. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . As you move the mouse. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 7 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

Cnst. For more information about SteeringWheels.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Similar controls. click Settings menu ➤ Options. press ESC. When drawing or modifying a building model. and click the SteeringWheels tab. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. expand Floor Plans. bottoms. display along the ends. and click Help. called drag controls. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and select the wall. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. moving the wheel to the desired location. 15 To exit the wheel. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. 17 Type ZR. expand Views (all). These are the drag controls. Small blue dots. and then using the Zoom tool again. and double-click 2nd Flr. referred to as shape handles. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. as shown.

The table moves down. to lengthen the wall. as shown. for example. and click again to specify the ending position.18 Click and drag the left control. click (Move). click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. such as Move and Copy. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . Some commands. In this case. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and on the Tools toolbar.

Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this example. Move. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. 26 On the Undo menu. such as the Lines command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Some commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. or press CTRL+Z. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. select the second item in the list. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 24 Select the plant. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. and drag it on top of the table. and click again to end it. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. click Lines. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line.

click Modify. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar.29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. In this tutorial. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. and annotate building assemblies. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. When you have finished these tutorials. In Revit Architecture. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. or referenced as a drafting view. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. but for training purposes. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. 27 . Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. illustrating how building components work together. detail. Use detail components to define an assembly. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality.

If necessary. and reference a drafting view. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. enter Window Head Detail. and click OK. for Name. click Training Files. 3 In the Scale list. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . create a reference callout. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. you will create a drafting view. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start.rvt. import a DWG detail. 2 In the Drafting View dialog.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

located directly to the left of the drawing area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. select Black and White.dwg. displaying the extents of the detail. as shown. 10 In the drawing area.In the Project Browser. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . click Training Files. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and click Open. 6 In the Colors field list. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. 9 Type ZR. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. The drawing area is still blank. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1.). The model zooms out.

The view displays to the specified area. and in the Scale list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. to activate the view selection list. 14 In the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar. click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 13 Click Reference other view.

Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. in the Type Selector. c_express_workshop_details_start. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Callout. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Model-Based Detailing | 31 .The reference callout is created.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click the reference callout tag head. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. adjust the detail view display settings. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail.

under Detail Views (Detail). 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click OK. 6 In the drawing area. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0. click Modify to clear the selection. enter Wall Base 1.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). and click Rename. for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.

for Display Model. under Graphics. and click OK. and click View Properties. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 13 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). select As Underlay.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 14 In the drawing area. right-click. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 16 Click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components.

19 In the Type Selector. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 17 On the View Control Bar. typical details can easily be placed. click Detail Components. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. 20 In the drawing area. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.Brick on Mtl. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Directly above the drawing area. By grouping detail components. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. Stud. type 1' 6''. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. If the crop region is enlarged.

25 In the Project Browser. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Create Instance. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. as shown.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. 23 Using the same method.

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.28 Press ESC to end the command.4" Slab detail. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.

4 On the Options Bar. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. special notes. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and Free End are selected. and format keynote styles. in the type selector. or instructions within a construction documentation package. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Browse. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. and under Keynote Table. for Full Path. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Training Files. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions.txt. and verify that Horizontal. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. c_express_workshop_details_start. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can customize this list. For more information about customizing a keynote database. click Keynote ➤ Element. Leader. map keynotes by material. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.

9 Press ESC to end the command. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.5 In the drawing area. 8 Click to place the tag. Keynoting | 39 . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. a question mark displays. If no value has been specified. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 7 Click to place the leader arm. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. Either move the text inside.

14 In the Keynotes dialog. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 16 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Material. 13 Click to place the tag. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 15 Select 07 21 00. and click OK. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 12 Click to place the leader arm.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Click Check None. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. legends. Select Keynote Tags. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Only the keynotes remain selected.All items within the selection display in red. Click OK. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.Boxed.

NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. update the project information element properties. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. this tutorial uses imperial units only. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In this exercise. Add labels to a title block. but for training purposes. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this lesson. Place views on drawing sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block.

Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. If necessary. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. or in the element properties of the title block. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). scroll until the folder is displayed.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 3 Click OK.

5 In the drawing area. enter A602. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. roll the wheel. 9 In the Project Browser. To pan. double-click Checker. Then. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. hold down the wheel and drag. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. For Name. under Sheets(all).4 Type ZR. right-click A602 . NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In this tutorial. and click Rename. Click OK. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.Unnamed. click Modify to clear the selection. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. 8 On the Design Bar. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. you can enter ZE to zoom out. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. enter Sections/Details. To zoom in and out. 6 In the Title Block. Smith and press ENTER. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. 7 Enter K. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle.

enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 Click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. (Left) is selected. 16 Type ZR. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Design Development. select Text : 1/8''. The Family Editor opens. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 20 Click and type Project Status. 18 On the Options Bar. click Text. For Project Status. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. enter J. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. Smith. For Client Name. enter 4/10/2008.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. select the title block. For Project Name. in the Type Selector. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing.

(Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. select Label : 3/16''. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click. 23 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter.21 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and click OK. click Label. click (Load into Project). to add 28 Using the same method. click Modify to exit the command. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. as shown. as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 22 Using the same method. under Category Parameters. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. in the Type Selector. and verify that (Top) are selected.

The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.Project. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Full Path. click Training Files. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. Next you will create. representing the view or schedule. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt. for Name. a viewport displays. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. place and modify a keynote legend. select Override parameter values of existing types. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend.30 In the Reload Family dialog. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. enter Keynote Legend . you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and under Keynote Table. click Browse. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. and click Yes. to a drawing sheet. In this exercise.

5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 . under Sheets (all).Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. as shown. on the Appearance tab. clear Show Headers. expand Legends. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. and drag Keynote Legend . and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser.

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.Project as shown. The keynote legend is visible. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.

16 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. and click Properties. click Edit. The Keynote Legend is now blank. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click OK. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. at the bottom of the Filter tab. select Filter by sheet. not keynotes. for View Name. under Legends. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Keynote Legend . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. for Filter. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. as shown. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.Project. enter Keynote Legend . and click OK.Sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 19 Click OK twice. expand Detail Views (Detail).

The view title with line displays below the viewport. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and then add and update a Drawing list. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. 2 In the Project Browser. double-click A0 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. as shown. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view remains selected. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.The keynote legend is automatically updated.

sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 3 In the Type Selector. define the information to include in a view title. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . As part of a construction document set. or omit view titles from sheets. Revit Architecture displays a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. The drawing list remains selected. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. as shown. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 6 Type ZR. Press ESC to clear the selection. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark.When you place a view on a sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. 5 In the Project Browser. by default. expand Schedules/Quantities.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. right-click the selected sheets.Ceiling Plans.Sections/Details and select A801 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Properties. 8 In the Project Browser. select A602 . NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. under Identity Data. under Sheets (all). including only sheets that contain views. while pressing SHIFT. The drawing list display is updated. clear Appears In Drawing List. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 .

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

57 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. As you develop the building design. a curtain wall. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. If the grid moves. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. it is good practice to test the constraints. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. For example. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques.

you will use the default template. In practice. and customize the project as necessary. you load any required family type that is not in your project. 5 Click OK. East. For this project. South. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. construction. click Training Files. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that the second option is selected. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. levels. In the drawing area in the right pane. select Project.rte. under Projects. To create the project file. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. such as a door or window. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. After the beginning exercises. but contains no geometry. click New. with an RVT extension. you use a template that is provided with the software. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. 2 In the New Project dialog. In views that display elevation markers. and click Browse. 3 Under Template file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. The new project opens. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. West. under Create new. and settings. you design inside the elevation markers. and residential. notice four elevation markers. The project is stored as a single file.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. Creating the Project In this exercise. from the product library. views. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial.

These views are customizable: you can rename them. and elevation views created in the project by the template. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Ceiling Plans. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and families in your project. and delete them. created by the template. Families. double-click South. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. As you design and document your building model. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Under Floor Plans. notice the Legends. will be accessible from the Project Browser. Groups. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 7 If necessary. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and click Training Files. such as schedules and legends. double-click Metric. duplicate them. Creating the Project | 59 . Two level lines. and duplicate levels. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. reflected ceiling plan views. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. heights. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. delete. and other properties. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. You can add. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. sheets. schedules. content and building model reports. display in the south elevation. expand Views (all).Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). enter Revit Retail Building. locate the Project Browser. 13 In the file window. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. change their properties.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. as well as change their names. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. then expand Floor Plans. Sheets (all). You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. the view you see in the drawing area. Schedules/Quantities. 14 For File name.

16 Click Save. enter 00 Foundation. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques.rvt) is selected. You learn how the levels are locked. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Views (all). After you modify the two default levels. so that when one level moves. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. When you begin designing. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. and on the General tab. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 17 Proceed to the next exercise. view the Save reminder interval. and double-click South. You change the names of the 2 default levels. doors. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building.15 For Save as type. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and press ENTER. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Project Files (*. the other levels move and change with it. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. and windows within the building model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. you will want to save your work frequently. to each other. Adding Project Levels on page 60. or constrained. Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. This is the Options Bar. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. view the Design Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 13 On the Options Bar. enter -1800. 5 In the Project Browser. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. If it does not. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels | 61 .TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and then move it up. right-click. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. enter 01 Entry Level. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. click Level. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. which should display by default. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default. and click Basics. enter 0. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. When you add the new level. and press ENTER. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 14 Click Plan View Types. and click OK. Next. not all the tabs are visible.

the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. click Modify to end the command. 25 Click to place the level line. 16 Enter 3750. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line.As you move the cursor. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. and for Offset. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 In the Project Browser. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Rename. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 18 In the Project Browser. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. Next. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. under Floor Plans. 26 Press ESC. using a different option. or on the Design Bar. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. and move it slightly upward. and enter 02 Level. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. enter 3750. 19 Click OK. If you create a level by copying it.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. click (Pick Lines). right-click Level 3. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. click Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. you add another level. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and rename the corresponding views.

Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. as shown. Adding Project Levels | 63 . the levels are no longer constrained. all the levels move. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.

Move the cursor up. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. select (Draw). specify a start point for the grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. 3 On the Options Bar. the column height changes as well. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. and specify the grid line endpoint. When the grid is complete. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. double-click 00 Foundation. click Modify. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. In the following exercise. under Floor Plans. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. so that if the roof elevation changes. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. On the Design Bar. click Grid. In a later exercise.

Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. click Grid. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. enter 7500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Click to place the grid line. click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. for Offset. for Offset. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. enter 4500 mm. Enter A. Next.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble.

as shown. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. click Grid. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .8 Press ESC. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 11 On the Design Bar.

select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned). 15 Starting with grid line A. 22 While pressing CTRL. 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. select grid lines C and 3.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click Dimension. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. Creating a Column Grid | 67 .

click the value for Center Segment. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and select grid line A. click and drag the blue circular grip up. until it is closer to grid line A. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. Two pins display on the grid lines. and on the Options Bar. 31 For End Segments Length. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. click Edit/New. click . 32 Click OK twice. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. 26 In the drawing area.5mm Bubble with Gap. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. At the left endpoint of the grid line. enter 50mm. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. until it is closer to grid line 5. 24 Press ESC. The pins are hidden. and select None. and press ESC. By pinning these central grid lines. 33 On the Design Bar. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Duplicate. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and press ESC. (Element Properties). Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. and click OK. If necessary. select grid line 5. enter 6. click Modify. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 29 In the Name dialog. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases.

35 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again. select all of the grid lines. click (Grid Intersection).5mm Bubble.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. 36 On the Design Bar. and in the Type Selector. and press ESC. select Grid : 6. and on the Options Bar. click Structural Column.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. For Place By. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. select Grid : 6. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. The original continuous grid lines are restored. 39 In the Type Selector. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . click Finish. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).

double-click 01 Entry Level. select 01 Entry Level. 47 Enter 9000. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. and unlock it. lock it. If it is unlocked. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 43 Press ESC. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 52 On the Options Bar. click Activate Dimensions. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select grid line A. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 45 While pressing CTRL. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 46 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. for From. Next. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. click Camera.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

expand 3D Views. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. named 3D View 1 by default. displays in bold under 3D Views. and click Rename. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Right-click 3D View 1. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. In the Rename View dialog. under Views (all). 57 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beams In this exercise. and click OK. enter To Building. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. The current view. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams on page 72.

verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. Adding Beams | 73 . 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. click Beam. 8 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. The view is currently set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. click (Create Beam On Grid). which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish. 7 On the Options Bar. the icon on the right side of the scale. 10 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. under 3D Views. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser.

press and hold SHIFT. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. right-click. under Floor Plans. 14 Select one of the beams. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. and click OK. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click (Default 3D View). The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. select 02 Level. select 06 Roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

21 With the column selected. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. and if necessary. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. (Element Properties).to the 5th level. and click Select All Instances. right-click. 22 On the Options Bar. select 06 Roof. 20 Click Cancel. under Constraints. view the Top Level parameter. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Instance Parameters. 06 Roof. Adding Beams | 75 . double-click To Building. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 25 In the Project Browser. When you created the columns. click 24 Press ESC. All of the columns display as red. for Top Level. and click Element Properties. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. resize the view to see the entire structure. right-click. and click OK. under 3D Views.

27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. but you want to display them in less detail. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. as lines only. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. 28 Save the drawing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Elevations.

To better add the braces to the structure. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces on page 77. you create 8 framing elevation views. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces | 77 . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. click Framing Elevation.29 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ESC to end the command.

78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 Using the same technique. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. but when placed the braces are placed. click Brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. After you add the final brace. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 8 In the Type Selector.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. press ESC twice. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 7 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation marker arrow. and when the endpoint snap displays. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. The associated framing elevation view displays. click to specify the start point of the brace.

IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER.

14 On the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. enter 10000 mm. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but this time add them from right to left.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

and press ENTER. click Activate Dimensions. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 23 In the Project Browser. enter 12000 mm.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. as shown in the 3D view below. NOTE As you add braces. 21 Select grid line A. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and on the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 29 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. lock it. click and roof height. under Elevations. beams. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 31 Save the drawing. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views. Creating a Foundation on page 82. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure.24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. grid size. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and if necessary. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. and drag it away from the structure. Test connectivity of the columns. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click {3D}. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

The pile cap has been added in the view. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. The foundation pile cap now displays. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). under Extents. and press ESC twice. for Level.rfa. After you load the pile cap family. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. Click OK twice.Before you can add the pile caps. In the Element Properties dialog. In the View Range dialog. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 9 Close the warning dialog. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Creating a Foundation | 83 . and expand Structural Foundations. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. expand Families. click Edit. click Training Files. double-click 00 Foundation. A warning displays. and drag it to the drawing area. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and click View Properties. select Unlimited. under Floor Plans. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and how to load specific families into a project. under View Depth.

When the final pile cap is placed. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap.

You load new column. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. double-click {3D}. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. 2 Select one of the columns. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. beams. right-click. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. beam. you change the types of the columns. and click Select All Instances. and brace families into the project. All columns in the building model display as red. under 3D Views.

click Duplicate.3 In the Type Selector. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The building model displays the round hollow columns. for d. This not the size that you want to use. for Type. 9 In the Type Selector. and click Select All Instances. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Modify. enter 75mm. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). The brace type changes. 17 While pressing CTRL.5CHS. In the following steps. 16 On the Design Bar. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 6 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). click Modify. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 18 In the Type Selector. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. double-click Elevation 1-a. under Dimensions. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. right-click. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 15 In the Project Browser. the braces as well as the beams change. enter 75mm. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.6X15.2X101. click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 13 In the Name dialog. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.9. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Brace. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 4 On the Design Bar. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and changing its size parameter. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Edit/New. you change the brace type.

Origin to Origin. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. select m_RRB_structure_complete. 3 Under Positioning.rvt.rvt. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. select Auto . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. After the files are linked. click Training Files. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.

select the linked Revit model.4 In the Project Browser. In this case. click Copy. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. After the link is established. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Tools toolbar. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. however. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 6 In the drawing area. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. and walls could also be copy/monitored. structural members. 9 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. under Elevations. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. double-click South. click (Copy/Monitor). 8 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. select Levels 00 through 06. Grids. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. and click Select Link. depending on the project.

Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 13 On the Design Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. right-click Level 1. First.10 On the Options Bar. 15 In the New Plan dialog. click OK. under Floor Plans. click Finish mode. while pressing SHIFT. and click Delete. 18 Using the same method. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 16 Click OK. for Floor Plan views. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click Finish. The 06 Roof floor plan opens.

enter Floor Plans. and click OK. for Name. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. right-click. under Floor Plans.19 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. select the Topography : Surface. double-click 01 Entry Level. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. click OK. 24 In the New View Template dialog.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . click Camera. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 34 In the 3D view that displays. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. under Names. select Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view.

and click Rename. expand 3D Views. such as roofs. 36 In the Rename View dialog. and railings are also created from sketches. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. enter To Building. click Training Files. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .35 In the Project Browser. and click OK. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Floors on page 92. Adding Floors In this exercise. Some other Revit Architecture elements. stairs. right-click 3D View 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. In this exercise. To create floors.

and elements in the current view display as gray. On the Options Bar. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If the grid changes size. click Dimension. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. select the top floor line. At the top left corner of the grid.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. and then the first horizontal grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Do not lock the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. On the Sketch tab. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click Lines. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Adding Floors | 93 . click Floor. under Floor Plans. click (Rectangle). sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. Leave this dimension unlocked. Move the cursor to the left. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.

and click the temporary dimension value. They display on the floor sketch. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. At the top left corner of the grid. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. and change their values to 300 mm. ■ 7 On the Design Bar.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the left dimension. press ENTER. Do not lock the dimensions. and then press ESC. Select and lock the dimensions. click Modify. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. select the top floor line. Enter 300. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.

and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. enter 1500mm. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click Edit. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. Next. and press ESC. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. using a different sketching technique. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click (Pick Lines). you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. On the Options Bar. double-click 02 Level. click Lines. and for Offset. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser.8 Select the floor. and lock the dimensions. click Floor. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Quit Sketch. Select the three remaining floor lines. on the Design Bar. On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 95 . ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and on the Options Bar.

19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. under Floor Plans. click Floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click Lines. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. click (Rectangle). click (Align). Click the locks to constrain the floors. and a lock icon displays. 20 On the Tools toolbar. The 02 Level floor displays. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. 14 On the Design Bar. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Options Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.

select 05 Roof Garden. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. and lock the edges. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. under Floor Plans. double-click 05 Roof Garden. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. click Finish Sketch. Adding Floors | 97 . Alternatively. 35 On the Sketch tab. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. and on the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. click Edit. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 32 Select the floor. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser.

you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. Adding a Roof In this exercise. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click Training Files. Click (Pick Lines).NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and press ENTER. ■ ■ For Offset. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to place the roof line. When a blue dashed line displays. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. To create the roof. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture.rvt. double-click 06 Roof. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. enter 1800 mm. Adding a Roof on page 98.

6 Select grid line 5. and when the blue dashed line displays. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 7 On the Options Bar. click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof | 99 . enter 300 mm. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. for Offset. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).10 Press ESC. click (Trim/Extend). select the roof.

for Elevation. on grid D. click Section.14 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and press ENTER. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. click (Add new points to the slab shape). and click to specify the section. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. Adding a Roof | 101 . click Modify. move the cursor down below the roof. enter -100 mm. 15 On the Options Bar.

23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click Modify. for Structure. for Structure [1]. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select the roof. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. 24 In the Project Browser. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). under Construction. click Edit. select Variable. double-click 06 Roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.20 On the Design Bar. 30 Click OK 3 times. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. click Edit/New. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. In section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 33 In the warning dialog. zoom in to the roof. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click (Default 3D View). moving counter-clockwise. 37 If necessary. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Roof | 103 . 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan.31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Fascia : Fascia . Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select the section line. 41 Starting with the left front edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 40 In the Type Selector. click OK. and press DELETE. In this case.Roof Edge. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. on the View Control Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

so if you resize the grid. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 44 Proceed to the next exercise.42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. under 3D Views. you add a curtain wall. the curtain wall resizes with it. click Modify.

enter Retail Storefront. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. for Type. For Level. The type is saved in the project. click Duplicate. select 05 Roof Garden. Click OK twice. for Spacing. When you duplicate a type. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 2100 mm. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 6 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. for Spacing. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Height. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click to place the first curtain wall segment. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. click Edit/New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. enter 600 mm.rvt. for Join Condition. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). enter 1050 mm. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 01 Entry Level. click Wall. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Under Construction. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click 01 Entry Level. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . select Horizontal Grid Continuous. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint.

Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Trim/Extend). 15 On the View Control Bar. If the grid moves.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. These dimensions are not in a sketch. double-click To Building. and trim each curtain wall segment. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. click Dimension. you can delete the dimensions. under 3D Views. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. If you want to hide them. 13 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimensions. so they remain in the view.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. click Training Files. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance on page 107.

5 Under Visibility. 2 On the View Control Bar. All the elements in the list are selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters. and click None. To better work with the curtain wall panels. and double-click South. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 7 Click OK. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under the element list.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 6 Under Visibility. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click All. clear one element to clear all the elements. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Do not select Columns. under Views (all). select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.

The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 17 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. 18 On the View Control Bar. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 12 With the panels selected.9 On the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 10 Select 1 panel. select Architectural Elevation. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. under 3D Views. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. double-click {3D}. select System Panel : Solid. in this case an architectural elevation. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.

110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown.19 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. double-click To Building. under 3D Views.

select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 24 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 32 In the Type Selector. and unpin it. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click Add or Remove Segments.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. select another mullion to the right. and click to select it. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. select One Segment. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 111 .

33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. press TAB until it is selected. click (Default 3D View). 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and view the new entrance. and unpin it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 34 On the View toolbar. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. select it.

you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. open the North elevation. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.38 Press DELETE. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and 4th panels. 40 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 39 Using the same process. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. 3rd.

under Floor Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 02 Level. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Right-click in the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Underlay. 5 Click OK.rvt. and click View Properties. under Graphics. click Training Files. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.

which indicates you must draw the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. 8 Select the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. and click OK.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . click Callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. enter Display Area. and click to complete the callout.

13 Select the section line. right-click. 12 Draw a section line. as shown. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. click Section. and click Flip Section.

for Prefer. click Wall. select Finish Face: Exterior. enter Section Display Area. Click (Rectangle). 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 25 Press ESC twice. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. For Loc Line.17 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall : Interior . select Wall faces. click (Align). 26 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Dimension. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . right-click Section 1. and click OK. expand Sections (Building Section). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans.135mm Partition (2-hr). ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser.

(Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. under Sections (Building Section). double-click 01 Entry Level. under Ceiling Plans.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. click Ceiling.) 36 Press ESC twice. 37 In the Project Browser. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 32 In the Type Selector. Next. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 38 On the View Control Bar. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. double-click Section Display Area. and lock the dimension. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the walls extend to the floor.

42 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 46 Press ESC. double-click 01 Entry Level. 47 In the Project Browser. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Top/Base. click (Element Properties). and click to select the walls. press TAB until you select the wall chain. double-click Section Display Area. under Ceiling Plans. click Attach. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. under Constraints. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . Select the 02 Level Floor. and click (Element Properties). press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. under Sections. click Modify. On the Options Bar. enter 2700 mm. for Height Offset From Level. and press ESC. click to select it. and click to select the walls. 43 On the Design Bar. for Base Offset. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling.

for Structure. click Edit. 54 Click OK. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line.49 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 58 On the Edit toolbar. for Type. double-click 01 Entry Level. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. view the ceiling structure. under Construction. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Cancel. click Cancel. click (Rotate). 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. and click .

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . and press ENTER. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. 61 Press ESC. enter 45.

66 Optionally. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. 64 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows Off. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows On. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.

double-click 01 Entry Level. and copy it to the 05 Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Move the cursor over grid line B. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 3 On the Options Bar. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and click to create a reference plane to the right. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. enter 1500 mm. click Training Files. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise.

You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 2. click Stairs.5 On the Design Bar. shorten the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Modify. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and specify a point to create first stair flight. C. and 3. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method.

225mm Masonry.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . 10 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down. click Wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Finish Face: Interior. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. and select the 2nd reference plane. The complete stair displays. 12 In the Type Selector. including its handrails. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair. Click (Rectangle). with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. and specify a point.

20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Align. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Lock the dimension. 18 Using the same technique. click Dimension. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the dimension value. for Prefer. and specify a point away from the wall. and click to select it. and press ENTER. enter 1200 mm. Select the interior face of the wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. Select the wall. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. select Wall faces. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Select the bottom of the stair. and lock the alignment. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments.

22 Click OK to delete the dimension. clear Tag on Placement. and press DELETE. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other.21 Select the dimension. (Undo). and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. The stair and walls move to the left. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. select both reference planes. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. a warning displays. 25 While pressing CTRL. TIP To flip the door swing. click Door. 23 Select the stair. Because the dimension is constrained. 28 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 27 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar.

30 On the Design Bar. for Multistory Top Level. 33 Select the stair. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 35 On the View toolbar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 44 On the Tools toolbar. For Top Constraint. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. (SteeringWheels). Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click Align. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. select 05 Roof Garden. (Default 3D View). Under Constraints. select all 4 walls. click 36 On the View toolbar. Click OK. (Rectangle). under Floor Plans. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. for Base Constraint. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. but if you view the top level of the building. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Element Properties). select 00 Foundation. Click OK. click Modify. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

52 In the Select Levels dialog. click (Default 3D View). on the View toolbar. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignment. and click OK. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. (SteeringWheels). click see the roof. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and lock the alignments. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft.

enter 300 mm. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level.55 In the Project Browser. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. By offsetting the base. For Top Constraint. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 59 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. 56 Select the shaft. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. for Base Offset. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).

Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden.rvt. and click OK. 2 Right-click in the view. select 06 Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. for Underlay.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View Properties. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. click Wall. under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click . select Elevation: South. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. The exact placement is not important. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. and on the Options Bar. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the right face of the wall. click (Align). and press ENTER. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Edit Profile.225mm Masonry. click Remove Constraints. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 17 On the Options Bar. and click Open View. select Basic Wall : Generic . enter 9750. click Lines. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and click (Fillet arc).5 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the error dialog.

and click (Circle). 22 In the Project Browser.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. under 3D Views. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . double-click {3D}. click . 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click Finish Sketch. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner.

24 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. and press ESC twice.5 Meters. 6 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Type Selector. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . click Component. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. select M_RPC Tree . 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. click Training Files. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. between grid lines C and D.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . 5 On the Basics tab. double-click 05 Roof Garden.4.

click Edit/New. 14 In the Name dialog. under Dimensions. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Apply. and then click OK twice. click Lines. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Type. (Element Properties). as shown. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 10 In the Project Browser.8 On the View toolbar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. select the 2 remaining trees. For Offset. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 1500 mm. click Floor. and in the Type Selector. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. double-click {3D}. 17 While pressing CTRL. for Height. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. enter 2400 mm. under Floor Plans. select M_RPC Tree . The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. under Floor Plans. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Select one of the trees. double-click 01 Entry Level.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 21 On the Design Bar. View the roof.5 Meters.5 Meters.

and click to sketch a line. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm. click (Draw). 26 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 25 Using the same method. for Offset. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .

and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. 35 Select the line that you just drew. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 On the Tools toolbar. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. move the cursor up 900 mm. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 32 Press ESC.

and click so he is facing the column. click Component. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height Offset from Level. enter Sidewalk. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 45 Click OK. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 48 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. 43 Click OK twice. In plan view. click Edit/New. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. The completed sidewalk displays.38 On the Design Bar. select M_RPC Male : Alex. near Column E5. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. enter -250 mm. 49 On the Options Bar. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. under Constraints. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. click Finish Sketch. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . Next. click Duplicate. and on the Options Bar. 42 In the Name dialog. as shown: (Element Properties). 39 Select the sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. a photorealistic image displays. When you render an image. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk.

53 Move the cursor clockwise. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 54 In the Type Selector.NOTE If necessary. 52 In the Type Selector. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. select M_RPC Beetle. click the car. 56 Press ESC twice. and click (Element Properties). click Camera. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. about 30 degrees. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

enter -300 mm. Next. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy.59 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and on the Options Bar. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. double-click To Building. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. When you select a host for a component. If the sidewalk changes height. under Constraints. double-click West. and click OK. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 64 Select Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . 60 In the Project Browser. 66 Using the same method. for Offset. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. under Elevations. 65 Click the sidewalk. and on the Options Bar. 63 Click the sidewalk. click Pick Host. click Pick Host.

142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. and replace them with a service core.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs. you delete the entire stairwell. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click 6 On the View toolbar. 4 Press DELETE. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . 3 Select the entire stairwell. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the View toolbar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.rvt. walls. click Training Files. and shaft opening.

13 In the drawing area.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. expand Model. and click Create Instance. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 11 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. 10 In the Project Browser. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and zoom in to the linked instance. and notice that the linked file is listed. click OK. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. and on the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand Groups. right-click m_RRB_core. double-click 01 Entry Level. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click (Align).

click Modify. (Default 3D View). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click 21 On the View toolbar. click Ungroup.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. ■ ■ Click grid line C. (SteeringWheels). 18 Select the core. and on the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click (top down view). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. or if the group layout is expected to change. 20 On the View toolbar.

You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. where it is hosted within a railing family. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. After you modify it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. and expand Railings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. click (Split). and select Glass. 13 On the Tools toolbar. The floor sketch displays. 8 In the Project Browser. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. expand Renderings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. double-click 02 Level.rvt. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 5 Expand Railing. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and Parapet. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and open Metric\m_Conference. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 3 In the Conference project. Handrail only. in the Project Browser. click OK. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. click Edit. expand Families. and click to split the floor. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. click Training Files. The rendering displays.

and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. and on the Options Bar. and click to draw another line. verify that Chain is not selected. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click Lines. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 24 On the Tools toolbar.15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. click Modify. and click to place it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 25 Select grid line B. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 29 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 31 In the Revit dialog. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. and lock the alignment. For Offset. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . select Glass.26 Select grid line D. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 30 On the Design Bar. click (Align). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing Properties. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 33 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimensions. enter 100 mm. and click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt project. click Railing. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. for Type. click Dimension.

41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.37 On the Design Bar. click Camera. click Dimension.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. lofty ceilings. 153 . balconies. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. slight modifications to the building design have been made. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. NOTE For training purposes. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. exterior fire stairs. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and a roof garden. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009.

154 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. including plan. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. elevation. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. how to create section and elevation views. section. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. 155 . you learn how to create views from a building model.

156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Level 2. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.2 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

Next. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. under Floor Plans. 14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click 1: 1000. and click OK. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt. 16 Right-click. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.

select Elevation: Building Elevation.rvt. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. double-click Level 1. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Elevation. 3 In the Type Selector.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. for Scale.

click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 15 On the Options Bar. select Section: Building Section. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. expand Floor Plans. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter South East.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. select 1:100. and click OK. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. for Scale. under Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ Move the cursor down. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. 14 In the Type Selector. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click South East. click Section.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to place it. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment. Click the midpoint of the section line. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and double-click Section 1. 23 On the View Control Bar. using the blue circular drag grip. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 .21 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand Sections (Building Section). select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right.

25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select Floor Plan.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. under Floor Plans. click Callout. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Callout Views | 167 .rvt. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.Resulting callout view . 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. double-click Level 1.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. click Modify. ■ Select the middle grip. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Type Selector. select 1:50. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. click Callout. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building.7 On the Design Bar. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. for Scale. select Detail View: Detail.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

and click OK. under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . expand Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.

and click Open. select Custom-Section Head. double-click Level 1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Training Files. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. the elevation markers. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. open Metric\Families\Annotations.rfa.

enter Section Head – Custom. 10 On the floor plan. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.5mm Square. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . select the current project. and click OK. 19 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. 22 In the Name dialog. .Filled. click Edit/New. click Load into Project. for Section Head. Section Tail . 12 For Section Tag. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. clear any others. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. and click OK. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. click Duplicate. scroll to Section Marks. Section Tail – Filled. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the section line. 17 Under Category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. and click OK twice. On the floor plan. and select 3. 4 On the Design Bar. select Section Head .Custom. enter 12. click Duplicate. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 2. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 15 Under Category. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. scroll to Section Line. and can be applied to the section line. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK.

select 12. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .23 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. . select Custom-Callout Head. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Training Files. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK.rfa. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. for Elevation Tag. select Square. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. For Line Weight. For Dimensions ➤ Width. On the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. 34 In the Name dialog. select the callout. click Duplicate. clear all others. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and click OK. 40 Press ESC. for Callout Tag. enter 6 mm. click Edit/New. notice the square elevation markers that display.5 mm. Click OK. 36 In the drawing. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. For Corner Radius. . The custom callout head displays on the floor plan.5mm Square. and on the Options Bar. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Options Bar. select 3. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. enter 12. Click OK. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.

view regions. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 49 Click OK. filters. scroll down to Callout Boundary. and select 7. select Dash. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select 4. 46 Under Category. 45 For Line Pattern. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. masking regions. click the Annotation Objects tab. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. expand Callout Boundary. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. You learn to create view templates. 43 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and visual overrides.

Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. under Elevations. click (Hide Crop Region). Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. The crop region displays as red. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. click Zoom to Fit. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.Creating a View Template In this exercise. To accomplish this. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 6 On the View Toolbar. click Training Files. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 5 On the View Control Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. click (Show Crop Region).

8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Callouts. under Visibility. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. elevation markers. 11 Under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. levels. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 13 On the View Control bar.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear Entourage. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. grids.

16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Create View Template From View. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.14 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. double-click North. and click OK.rvt. 15 In the New View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. right-click North. click Apply. and click OK. click OK. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. right-click East. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. edit the crop region as before. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 Using the same method. 18 In the Project Browser.

select Penthouse. double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. select Level Below (Level 4). for View Range. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. Click OK twice. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. right-click. click Edit.rvt. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. under Extents. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . and click Properties. for Level. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. select Level Below (Level 4). you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan.

right-click. select Level 4. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. under Extents. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. for Level. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. for Bottom.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. for View Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Roof Plan. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.

click Plan Region. 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. Click OK twice. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. for View Range. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Under View Depth. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 13 On the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. click Lines. for Level. for Bottom. under Extents.

After you apply the filter. the fire rating of the walls. under Views (all). the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Filters tab. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.rvt.17 On the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. in this case. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.

19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . select Fire Rating. click Add. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Rated Walls. 16 Click OK. for Color. click Override under Patterns. enter Rated Walls. click Remove.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 7 In the Filters dialog. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Categories. 12 On the Filter tab. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. and click OK. 9 Click OK. and click OK. click OK. and apply a color. 17 Using the same method. under Filters. click <No Override>. select Solid Fill. 11 Select Rated Walls. under Projection/Surface. 5 In the Filters dialog. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. click Edit/New. 14 In the Color dialog. Select contains. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. Enter Hr. select the red color. and click OK. under Basic colors. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Pattern. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Walls. and click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. click (New).

To accomplish this. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.

under Floor Plans. 7 On the View menu. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. right-click. 8 Select the crop region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Show Crop Region. 5 On the View menu. 9 On the View Control Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. as shown. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click Rename. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Masking Region. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 11 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.

14 On the Design Bar.12 On the Options Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle).

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.rvt. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click. 11 Click OK twice. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click Override. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Level 1. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. right-click Unit 18 Plan . and click Rename. under Pattern Overrides. 7 Under Cut. under Floor Plans. select Solid fill. click the current scale. click <No Override> to apply a color. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . click black. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Walls. right-click. for Color. under Visibility. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. and click 1: 50. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. click in the Patterns field. for Pattern.

click Modify. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Under Visibility. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. and click OK.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

select Dash. click a purple color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. for Color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Projection Lines.20 Right-click. for Pattern. right-click. and click OK. 23 In the Color dialog. select the sofa. By using the previous method to make the selection. 25 Click OK twice. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. click Override. under Lines.

right-click. click . click Modify. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar.28 For Color. 29 In the Color dialog. and click OK twice. click By Category Override. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 30 On the Design Bar.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click . and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.33 On the View Control Bar. how to add views to the sheets. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click View. right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. select A0 metric. click Training Files. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. click Sheet.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.Creating Sheets. and click OK.

5 When the title block highlights. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Name. For Sheet Number. enter A101. and select the title block.

Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . For Project Status. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter 15 May. 2009. for Project Address. For Project Number. click Edit. For Project Name. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 14 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. under Other. enter 2009-1. enter For Approval. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter J. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. Smith. The new project information displays in the titleblock.

right-click.Sections A108 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A106 . 17 In the Project Browser. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. and click Rename. and click Save. and click OK. for Name.Elevations A107 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric. you add views to these sheets. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Elevations A105 . enter Floor Plan.rvt.Layout Plan A104 .Stairs In the following exercise. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select the new sheet name. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

Elevations. under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and click to place the view.Floor Plan. click Modify. The red border around the view no longer displays. double-click A102 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select Level 1. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A104 . 4 On the Design Bar. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click to place it.rvt. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and drag it to the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser.

Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Sections. click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). double-click A107 . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.

select 1:5. . 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and click OK. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and press TAB until it highlights. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. move the cursor over it. for View Scale. 16 Select title bar. zoom in to the grip.

and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. double-click A108 .Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. under Sheets (all). 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.Stairs.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. and click Activate View.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise.rvt. click Modify. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 2 Select the building section view. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. you must first activate the view on the sheet. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. right-click. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. under Sheets (all). Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. In order to do this.Sections. enter 16700 mm. double-click A107 .

8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. and click Deactivate View.rvt. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet.6 Right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. double-click North. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and click Properties. select the new sheet name. For Sheet Name. select A0 metric. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. and click OK. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. right-click. The camera view displays. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. click Camera. enter T. Click OK.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the camera as shown.

8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Click OK. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Under Camera. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. For Target Elevation. enter 100000 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Eye Elevation. double-click T . under Sheets (all). For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 18000 mm. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 1500 mm. 12 On the View Control Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . Under Extents.Title Sheet.

25 On the Design Bar. Click Apply.15 With the view selected. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Under Model Crop Size. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm. click Size. on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). and then click OK. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. 24 Click OK twice. and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Modify. . click Modify. for Show title. and on the Options Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. under Graphics. for Height. select No. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.

and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Because of the open style floor plan.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Training Files.rvt. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as room and window schedules.Level 1. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. 207 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tagging Objects In this lesson. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

as shown: 5 Using the same method. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.6 Using the same method. 9 In the Tags dialog. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. click Load.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 For Offset. and the rectangle contains the room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. click OK. type U18-1. 11 In the Tags dialog.rfa. 16 On the Design Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. type 2400 mm. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Room. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click to place the room and tag. and press ENTER. click Modify. click Training Files. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click it. and select the room tag. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. indicating that it can be edited.

and press ENTER. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Sequential letters are also supported. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Dining. and press ENTER. 22 Click the room text label. place rooms and tags. type Kitchen. 19 On the Design Bar. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . 23 Using the same method.18 Click the room text label. click Room. type Entry. click Modify.

click Room Tag. 27 On the Design Bar. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. under Floor Plans.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. The rooms are already placed. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. but they need to be tagged. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . on the Model Categories tab.Level 2. 29 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and moving clockwise. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

Level 1. click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. in the Project Browser. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. clear Leader.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

11 Using the same method. select Corridor. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. click New. type Corridor. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. add 5 more rooms. type Building Entry. select Storage. for room 101. for Name. type Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. next to Rows. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 105. and press ENTER. For 104.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-46. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. 101-106. For 103. For 102.

under Floor Plans.rvt. click the Lines field. under Projection/Surface. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. 13 Save the file. click Override. In the Lines field. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.■ For 106. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . For Weight. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. place rooms from a program list. For Room Separation. In the Line Graphics dialog. Under Custom colors. select 9. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and click OK. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK twice. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1. under Visibility. type Stair. you add room separation lines. expand Lines. and press ENTER. click the Color field. and modify room names.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . First. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Modify. click Room. draw the horizontal line. click Room Separation. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 101 Building Entry. for Room. 14 For Offset. type 2400 mm. select 102 Storage. 13 On the Options Bar.

double-click Room Schedule. 16 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 19 In the Project Browser. place the following rooms. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 17 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . under Schedules/Quantities. click Modify. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. double-click Level 1. 20 While pressing CTRL.

while pressing CTRL. and click OK. for Rows. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 24 Open the Room Schedule. click New. and for all 3 finishes. select Rooms. select Base Finish. Floor Finish. click Schedule/Quantities. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click 23 On the Design Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type Units. 27 Select Schedule keys. under Category. and Wall Finish. click Modify. type As Selected. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. clear Room Bounding. and click OK. (Element Properties). under Available fields.21 On the Options Bar. 31 For Key Name. and click Add. under Constraints. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Check None. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 43 In the Filter dialog. 44 On the Options Bar. select Rooms. under Identity Data. for Room Style. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. select Room Style. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 42 On the Options Bar. click Edit. select Units. click (Element Properties). 38 Under U17-8. 36 Click OK twice. and click Add. select Units. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 37 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Room Schedule. under Floor Plans. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Fields. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Available fields. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents.32 Using the same method. double-click Level 1. for Room Style.

for Color. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click 5 For Title. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and 106. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). and click OK. and apply it to the Level 1 view. and click Properties. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. click the Color Scheme field. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. select Public. at the warning prompt. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. type Room Type. (Duplicate). you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 104. 48 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.46 Open the Room Schedule. select Room Style. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Service. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Floor Plans. under Graphics.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Name. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. type Room Type. 103. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. click OK. right-click Level 1. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101.

click Modify. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select the color legend. click Edit Color Scheme. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . and click OK. select Room Type. 14 Click OK twice. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Edit. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Visibility. click Color Scheme Legend. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. expand Lines. click the value in the Color column. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Schemes. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 19 On the Options Bar. clear Visible. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and clear Room Separation. When you move the cursor over the drawing area.

click Edit/New. select blue. 28 Under Title Text. type 5 mm. 30 On the Design Bar.22 In the Color dialog. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. for Swatch Width. click Modify. 24 Click OK. 23 Using the same method. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Size. (Element Properties). type 25 mm. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . respectively. and click OK. under Graphics. under Custom color. 29 Click OK twice. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected.

under Sections. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . select Rooms. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. under Sections. double-click Building Section. and click OK. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. select Room Type. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. and select Properties. 35 Click OK twice. right-click Building Section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Graphics. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. click Edit. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. for Color Scheme. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. under Identity Data.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 46 Click . 45 While pressing CTRL. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Public. click Check None. for Room Style. under Identity Data. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. select all the rooms in the stairwell. click . (Filter Selection). select Units. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. and click OK.

under Schedules/Quantities. and click .Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select Service. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . under Key Name for the new row. type Suites. for Rows. excluding the stairwell spaces. 51 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 54 While pressing CTRL. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. double-click Room Style Schedule. click New.

and click OK. for Room Style. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select Suites.55 Click . and click OK. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. but not beyond it. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. verify that At wall finish is selected. select the room on the left side of the top floor. select Areas and Volumes. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill will extend to the roof. The color fill extends to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation.

Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 67 On the first level. select Level 2. click Modify. 71 Click OK. type -254 mm. select Loft. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. under Constraints. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Click OK. 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . 68 Click .0. select the stairwell room. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). and click 65 For Limit Offset. the dining room. and the living room. 70 For Limit Offset. . type 0.

You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. under 3D Views. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file.

click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Roofs. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. click Family and Type. For Then by. select Family and Type. under Category. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and click Add. and click OK. Clear Itemize every instance. Select Grand totals.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Material: Description. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 9 Using the same method. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . under Available fields. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 While pressing CTRL. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.EPDM. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.

select Calculate totals. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 12 Click OK. click Edit. click Estimated Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. and click Properties. under Available fields. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 21 Click OK. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff.40 50. for Name. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). Under Field formatting. select Material: Area. and click Add. select Material: Cost.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. type Estimated Cost.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 17 Click Calculated Value. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. and under Fields. 20 For Formula. for Fields. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 23 For Field formatting. select Calculate totals. for Material: Cost. 19 For Type. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. and click OK twice. select Currency. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. click the Formatting tab.

This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 30 Click OK twice. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. which inserts commas after every three digits. and are defined and stored in an external file. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. select $. tag the line. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. 31 Save the file. 26 In the Project Units dialog. 29 Select Use digit grouping. regardless of category. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. These shared parameters can be added to any family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. either within family components or within the project template. not just for currency. you create an exiting plan for the building. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Digit grouping. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. creating a generic tag to tag the family. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. can be used for any number-based parameter. and reporting the shared parameters. for Currency. In this lesson. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. adding the shared parameters to a family. for Rounding. You draw a travel path line. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 28 For Unit symbol. you create a shared parameter file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . click the Format value. 27 In the Format dialog.35 The Estimated cost is calculated.

1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. select Length. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. type Travel Distance.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Name. 7 Under Parameters. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Create. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for File name. 9 Under Parameters. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files. 11 Click OK twice. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. type Path ID.txt. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. click New. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1.rvt. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. and click Save. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. type Exiting. and click OK. click New. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. for Type of Parameter.

for Travel Distance Formula. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 10 Using the same method. under Parameters.rfa. Click Training Files. 11 Click OK. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . under Dimensions. click Load into Projects. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. and click OK. 15 If necessary. 13 Click Apply. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. otherwise the family loads into the current project. select Shared parameter. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. for Group parameter under. 8 Select Instance. in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameter Type. click Family Types. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open. 3 On the Design Bar. select Constraints. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameter Data.rvt. following the equals symbol (=). group it under Dimensions. type Length. 14 On the Design Bar.rvt. under Parameters. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and select Instance.

and click OK. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Label.rft. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click (Add Parameter). click parameter(s) to label). 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 24 Click OK twice. click Select. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Label. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. under Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. click Training Files. under Category Parameters. 25 In the Edit Label dialog.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 19 On the Design Bar.

and click Save.rfa. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. click Load into Projects. type M_Travel Distance Tag. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . and move it down. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. select Path ID. 33 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.28 On the Design Bar. 35 Save the file. click Modify. and press DELETE. for File Name. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.rvt is selected. 29 In the drawing window.

double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right. under Floor Plans. above the exterior door as shown. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. click Component. After the lines are tagged. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Placing.Level 1. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click in the center of the corridor. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.Tagging. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Chain.

14 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. verify that Chain is selected. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 13 While pressing CTRL. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . move the cursor near the right corner.Level 2. clear Leader. and click outside of the building. for Path ID. type 1-1. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. click Modify.Tagging. through the door.7 Move the cursor down. 17 On the Options Bar. Placing. under Constraints. click Component. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. double click Exiting Plan .

move the cursor to the left. and click above the door to the stair. and click. and click in the stair. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 23 Move the cursor down.

. and click OK. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Category. 27 On the Design Bar. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. for Path ID. click Modify.24 On the Design Bar. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 28 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. Placing. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Using the same method. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. type 2-1. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click Tag ➤ By Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.Tagging. 33 For Name. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints.

35 Click the Filter tab. and click OK. in the second field. and under Field formatting. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. in the first field. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Available fields. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Add. click Edit. select Path ID. 43 In the Project Browser. and in the third field. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Training Files. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Path ID and Travel Distance. type 1-. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 40 Click the Formatting tab. in the third field. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 38 For Sort by. for Filter by. select Calculate totals. while pressing CTRL. 50 Save the file. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. and click Rename. type 2-. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 36 For Filter by. 44 In the Project Browser. 49 Click OK twice.rvt. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Travel Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Filter. under Schedules/Quantities. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select contains. under Other. select Path ID. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 41 Under Fields. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.

select Walls. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . expand C .Fixed Partitions. and select C1010145 . and click .Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Interiors ➤ C10 .Partitions . under Identity Data. and click View.152 mm. right-click Generic . click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. 9 Click OK twice. 10 In the schedule. under Categories. and click Properties. and click OK.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 4 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. for Assembly Code. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. right-click the Design Bar. click the Value field. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .

5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. click the File Data Source tab. click Create. under Database.11 Close the exercise file. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Training Files. 11 Click OK 3 times. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. and click Next. click OK. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. the database display may be different than that shown. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 8 In the New Database dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK to create the database. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 3 Click New. 9 Under Directories.mdb). The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 1 On the File menu. and click Next. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. for Database Name. type Revit_Project. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog.rvt. select a location for the database file.

For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Additionally.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. 13 Close the exercise file. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project.

262 .

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

Detailing 7 In this tutorial. add detail components. In order to detail from the building model. In the callout view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard door header condition. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. 297 . You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you trace over the building model geometry. and metal studs. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. plywood. These components display at the required scale. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.

The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects.Detailing the View In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. After you add components. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You load detail components. double-click the detail callout head. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and insulation objects. Exact location is not important. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. select As underlay. which means that all detail components.rvt. They are also view specific. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. The roof overhang detail displays. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Detail Component. 7 In the drawing area.rfa. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. as well as detail lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you detail the view of the roof edge. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 5 In the alert dialog.

Detailing the View | 299 . click (Element Properties).5mm. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 406. click Duplicate. 15 For Spacing. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 16 Click OK twice. click Modify. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 10 On the Options Bar. 17 In the drawing area.8 Delete the component. select Corrugated Metal. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Repeating Detail.

verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 24 In the Type Selector.rfa. click Training Files. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. and on the Edit toolbar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click Load. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . ■ ■ Click Modify.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click (Move). 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. and click Open. 22 On the Options Bar.

Detailing the View | 301 .rvt.Because you still have several components to load. click OK. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 30 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 31 To properly orient the component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 33 In the Type Selector. and place it in the detail view as shown. click Detail Component. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 29 On the Design Bar. you load them as a group from a single file. and click Open. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.

click the Flip instance arrows. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Chain. and click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 37 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the horizontal segment.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.

43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. select to near side. click Insulation.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click Modify. click (Move). as shown. For Offset. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. Detailing the View | 303 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. enter 140mm.

304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 51 Click Modify. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 47 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector.rvt. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and lock the component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. you add lines to your detail. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. meaning they display only in this view. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Like detail components. 52 Proceed to the next exercise.45 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. as shown. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.

enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. For Offset. click Detail Lines. as shown. select Medium Lines. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. For Offset. enter 10mm. and press ENTER. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.4 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 7 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER.

Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and clear Chain. as shown. click (Draw).

click Detail Lines. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 26 In the Type Selector. When you turn the display model off.18 In the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select the Penthouse level line. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. right-click. and click Properties. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. draw the detail lines as shown. Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. 24 On the View Control Bar. enter 10mm. select Do not display. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select Vapor Barrier. select Thin Lines. right-click Roof Overhang Detail.

select M_Break Line.29 On the Design Bar. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Adding Text Notes on page 308. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 32 Click Modify. press SPACEBAR as necessary. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. 30 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.

click Dimension. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Enter the text. 6 Click Modify. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. click Text.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Click again to specify the location of the text box.

and click OK. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Detail Components on page 310. select a text note. clear Detail Items and Dimensions.7 Select the dimension line. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. right-click. under Text Fields.rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. for Suffix. and click the dimension text. and save the exercise file. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and press DELETE. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. and click OK. click Roof Overhang Detail. (Filter Selection). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. right-click. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. enter Typ. and click OK. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click.Keynotes. enter Roof Overhang Detail . click Select All Instances. and click Rename.

13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. Creating Detail Components | 311 . select all the coping linework. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. while pressing CTRL. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 16 Click Modify. in the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment.7 Click Modify. pressing TAB. 14 Click Modify. click Training Files.rft. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click Open. select Medium Lines. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping.

double-click it in the Project Browser. navigate to your preferred location. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . clear Detail Items. select the coping. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail.18 In the Save As dialog. 22 Click Modify. delete the underlying linework. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.Keynotes view is not the open view. 25 In the Filter dialog. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. 26 Press DELETE. 24 On the Options Bar. click Load. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 23 Using a window. Adding Keynotes on page 312. The original linework remains selected. 31 Using the same method used previously. and click OK. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 30 In the drawing area. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . for File name. 28 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar.rfa. 21 To place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click . enter Roof Edge. click Training Files. and click Open. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. you place keynotes on objects. While pressing SHIFT. and click Save. and the component can be placed in the detail. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects.

click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the alert dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Edit/New. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.D11. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. use keynote 07645. and click OK. use keynote 06160. Roof Edge4. 19mm Plywood.B5. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rfa. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. (Element Properties). and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open.C1. Adding Keynotes | 313 .rvt. For the metal coping. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. In the Keynotes dialog. 6 Click Modify. 63mm Rigid Insulation. Click to place the leader arm. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. select the metal fascia with drip edge.

For the 50 x 200. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted.I1.9 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.D1.G1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.A8. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Corrugated Metal. using keynote 07460. use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times. 17 Keynote the component. You do this in order to keynote the component. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110. use keynote 06160. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 22mm Corrugated Steel . use keynote 06110.F1. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.20 Ga. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. 15 In the Type Selector.D11. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Save the file. For the 50 x 300. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 09250. FasciaProfile_1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click in the Value column. click Keynote ➤ Element.F1. For the 50 x 150.

8 In the Save As dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. 11 Press DELETE. click Detail Component.rft. for File name. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 5 In the drawing area. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Duplicate. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Name dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Edit/New. 9 On the Design Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Medium Lines. 22 On the Options Bar. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 In the Type Selector. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. select the left end point of the reference line. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Select the component.rvt. and click (Element Properties). click Load. and click Open. and m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Lines. 15 Click Modify. click Load into Projects. navigate to your preferred location. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. click Training Files. and click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. and click Save. click Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar.

on the Edit toolbar. and hidden) used in the view. 27 On the Design Bar. 31 Select the component. 28 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 47 Select the component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. 30 Click Modify. enter EPDM Membrane. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail.G1. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 46 Click Modify. invisible. click Detail Component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Edit/New. and click . and assign it keynote 06110. and click the lower end at the break line. and click .A5. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 41 Select the component just added. and click OK. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . 38 On the Design Bar.A1. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.25 Next. name the component Air Barrier. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 42 Using the same method used previously. 48 Using the same method used previously. click (Move). 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 29 In the drawing area. 49 With the component selected. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click Detail Component. 34 In the Name dialog. and click . 40 Click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. against the 19mm plywood. click in the Value column. 37 Click OK 3 times.

select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. select Chain. and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 52 In the Type Selector. 55 Click Modify. leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar.

select the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 50 x 200 Framing. 61 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Element.58 Using the method used previously. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 68 In the drawing area. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 60 On the Design Bar. 67 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 07260. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . in the Type Selector. click Load into Projects. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.rfa.A4. and Vapor Barrier. name the component Vapor Barrier. Air Barrier. click Detail Component. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. select Invisible Lines. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.

71 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. under Keynote Table.A1.A4. and press TAB. The database file opens in a text editor. click Browse.A9.txt. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press ENTER. click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Enter 07463. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . name the component Batt Insul. 70 Using the method used previously. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.69 Select the component. Enter 07460. 3 In the text editor. and assign it keynote 07210. add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and close the text editor. and click . and press TAB.rvt. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.. 72 Save the file. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.

11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 9 In the drawing area. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. These details do not update with changes to the building model. select all the keynotes.A1. and click OK. and click to place the note. click to place the leader. After you create a drafting view. select Absolute. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.txt. under Path Type. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click Open. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 14 Save the file. navigate to 07463. click Keynote ➤ Element. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. 13 Click Modify. Each keynote displays as a simple number. In the Type Selector. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. and click OK. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. The descriptive text for each keynote displays.

Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Center to Center is selected. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click Rename. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. Click Open. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . 6 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 5. verify that Auto . Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise.dwg. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. right-click Drafting 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. and click OK. and click OK. for Scale. For Colors. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. select Black and White.rvt. The detail is imported as an import symbol. For Positioning. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog.

and use the callout grips to move the callout head. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. for New. enter Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). click Rename. delete the existing value. 3 On the Options Bar. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Callout. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Reference other view. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the callout.No Reference. 5 Click Modify. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. and click Properties. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Rename dialog.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

No Reference). The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail./Det. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and double-click the callout. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Sect. click Modify. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.Elev. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. double-click A105 . 18 Save the file. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.

3 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and click OK. . Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter Header @ Sliding Door. enter Gyp. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Region Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown.rvt. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. Board.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.

15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click Finish Sketch. 20 On the Design Bar.5mm. 19 In the Type Selector. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . and enter 20. click . click (Draw). 18 While pressing CTRL. (Mirror). Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 17 Click Modify. select the width dimension. click 22 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines.

326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region.Finish.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Region Properties. 30 In the Name dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Filled Region. click Edit/New. Move the cursor up. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. 25 Click Modify. enter Wood . 31 In the Type Properties dialog. . and click above the top of the region as the end point.Finish. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Name. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.

click (Rectangle). sketch the new region as shown. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector.5mm. and select the right edge of the wood region. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. select Medium Lines. 39 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. Draw a rectangle as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click Filled Region. 38 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click (Align). 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select Medium Lines. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click .

For Offset. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 47 Click the reference plane. click Ref Plane. enter 10mm. click Finish Sketch. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Filled Region. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 6mm. For Offset. and press ENTER. 46 On the Tools toolbar. (Align). click 48 Click Modify. and press ENTER.42 On the Design Bar.

55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and click to select the point. click (Trim/Extend). and press ENTER. and click to select the point. Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 54 On the Tools toolbar. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left 25mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. enter 0. For Offset. Select Chain. and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 .

68 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and right edges of the door panel region. select Medium Lines. 65 On the Options Bar.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 58 In the Type Selector. For Offset. click Detail Component. top.rfa. click Detail Lines. enter 3mm. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 63 Repeat for the right detail line. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. enter 76. 62 Select the left detail line. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 61 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load. select the height dimension. click Training Files. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and press ENTER. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 69 Select the bolt. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 60 Select the left.2mm.

use the images as a guide. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.70 On the Design Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . and click Open. 76 In the Type Selector. click Training Files. click Detail Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Component. select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Load.

82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . 84 On the Design Bar. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 85 On the Options Bar. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. (Mirror).

89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 90 In the Type Selector. 92 Select the line. select Medium Lines. as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown.

96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. enter 3mm. click .94 Select the mirrored line on the right. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines. 95 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. and click to place the arc as shown. select the length dimension. and press ENTER. 99 Click Modify. 97 On the Options Bar. 101 On the Design Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.

110 Select the dimension line. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . and click Modify. 106 Click to place the dimension.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Dimension. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown.5mm Arial. click Dimension. 105 In the drawing area.

118 Select Modify to end the command. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .5mmArial. 114 Click OK. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 113 Under Text Fields. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. for Below. click Dimension. and then click the dimension text. under Dimension Value. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. select Replace With Text. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. and enter Varies. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . enter See Schedule. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types.2. and click the dimension text.

127 Enter Gyp. click Text. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. select the gypsum board region on the left. click to create an arced leader. and click Modify. and click to place the text. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 125 In the Options Bar. Board. 123 Click OK. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 126 In the drawing area. 128 Select the note.121 Click OK. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader).

132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. and double-click East. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. 339 . The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. click Training Files.

Hexagon. for Number of Leaders. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the keynote. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . type 1. 5 On the Options Bar.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Symbol. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.

on the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. Creating a Note Block | 341 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for Text. under Identity Data. and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Select the tag.

14 With the copy selected. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. on the Edit toolbar. type B. on the Options Bar. click Copy. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 18 Using the same method. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 16 For Tag. (Mirror). 17 Click OK. and click. 15 For Text. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Repair existing door surround.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Clean exterior brick wall. 22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Remove all existing windows. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. using the table as a reference. Tuckpoint as required. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and moving counter-clockwise.21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required. Repair existing door surround. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate.

On the Appearance tab. under Available fields. select Tag. On the Sorting/Grouping tab.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 29 In the Project Browser. and click Add. and select Bold. select Center. for the value. Create. 27 In the column header (text). verify that Arial is selected.Elevations. and click Add. for Heading. 28 In the Project Browser. format. for Header text. for Sort by. type Mark. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. Clean cut and repair wall as required. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Tag. and click OK. and for Alignment. 26 Click OK. On the Formatting tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and drag it to the sheet. select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and double-click A103 . expand Sheets (all). type 6 mm. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Select Text. type Description. type Exterior Construction Notes. for Note block name.

rvt. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click T . you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.31 On the Design Bar. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.rvt.

select Sheet Number. select Sheet Index. and in the third field. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Select Sheet Name. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Filter tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Number. 6 In the Project Browser. for Filter by. in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities. double-click T . select does not equal. 7 In the Project Browser. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Sheet Number. and click Add. The drawing list displays. ■ 4 Click OK. type T. 5 In the list title field. and click Add.Title Sheet. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . in the first field. under Available fields. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and drag it to the sheet. under Sheets (all). for Sort by.

you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and door frames. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on). you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. click Modify. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. 11 Save the file. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Finally. On construction documents. door frame schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. doors. For the text. windows. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Training File Using Legends | 347 .

Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Symbol.rvt. type Legend Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. for Name. click Text. type Typical Symbol Legend. for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head .Open Level Head . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. and click OK. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 6 On the Options Bar.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 10 For Text Size. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 3mm. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 9 For Text Font. select Arial. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click . and click OK. click Duplicate. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create a text type with the necessary size. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Site Plan/Floor Plan. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and for Leader. and double-click A101 . click Typical Symbol Legend. and click to place it.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all). expand Legends. verify that is selected. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. 16 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport : No Titlemark. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 23 Save the file. click Modify. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 . and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 21 In the Type Selector.Unit 18. 22 On the Design Bar.

7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. select Medium for Detail Level. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and press ENTER. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click Legend Component.rvt. 5 On the View Control Bar. For View. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select 1 : 50. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. type 900 mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Section. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 For Scale.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. For Host length. and click OK.

click Modify. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 10 Select the second wall. for Leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. click Text. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.9 On the Design Bar. for Family. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 On the Options Bar. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

23 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. The text note with leader is added to the legend. select Level 4. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . pressing ENTER between component descriptions. right-click Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. 19 Type the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser.

double-click Level 4.25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. drag it onto the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The open drawings are both visible. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Legends. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 29 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types.

zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select Detail Level: Medium. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 33 In the floor plan view. 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select the Wall Type 2 component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.

rvt. In this exercise. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. or changes in building material availability. You can create a sequence of revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. contractor inquiries. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.36 Optionally. under Floor Plans. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using the table. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. click 37 Save the file. double-click Level 4. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. These changes can be due to owner requests. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

If you select Per Sheet. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 Under Show. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. In general. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. if the active revision is number 1. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. When you use this option. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. the revision is locked and issued to the field. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. type a date. yet as concise as possible. for Numbering. When Issued is selected. In most instances. If Visible is not selected. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. For example. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . verify that Per Project is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 5 For Description. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.

move the cursor up. including revision number and revision date. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 6 On the Design Bar. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 9 Save the file. click Modify. 4 On the Edit toolbar. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 3 Select the divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click Level 4.rvt. 5 Select the divider. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move). you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.8 Click OK.

select Snaps Off. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Revision Cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . 11 On the Design Bar.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click near the partition you moved. 8 In the drawing area. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. In the Snaps dialog.

select 6. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click OK. for Line Weight. you load a revision tag into the project.

rvt. You then issue a revision. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you create additional revisions in the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. click Tags. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rfa. 11 Click to place the tag. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Tag ➤ By Category. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 12 Save the file. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. you need to add one. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. select Leader. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 5 In the Tags dialog. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 4 On the Options Bar. Because you chose to number by project. double-click Level 4. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 10 In the drawing area. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Load. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 8 In the Tags dialog. Working with Revisions In this exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud.

rvt. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. select Issued. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Add. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision.Unnamed. type Modify Paving Area. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you prevent further changes to the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. double-click A107 . and click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. with the description Relocate Door. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 7 For Description. and enter a date for the revision. 8 Add another revision row. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. and enter a date. You can continue to add revisions. 9 Click OK. you can no longer modify it.

11 On the Drafting tab.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. in the drawing area. select Revision Cloud. 15 On the Options Bar.Modify Paving Area. under Sheets (all). 13 Click Finish Sketch. apply Seq. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 10 In the Project Browser. select Seq. Working with Revisions | 363 . double-click Level 4. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. select the revision cloud. select Tag ➤ By Category. 3 . double-click A107 . under Floor Plans. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. for Revision. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 2 . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. 12 In the drawing area.Unnamed. 20 On the Project Browser. 17 Using the same method learned previously. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 19 To add tags.

23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. and rotation) to the revision schedule. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. Click Options. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. select the titleblock. beginning with "D". you edit the titleblock family. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. 26 In the drawing area. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. height. clear Issued. 25 Click OK twice. for Sequence. for Numbering. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. You do this so that the revision can be changed. delete the first 3 characters. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. For each revision. select Alphabetic.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.

for Appearance. and press DELETE. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. click Modify. 34 On the Design Bar. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Grid lines. Select Outline. 28 In the alert dialog. click Load into Projects.27 On the Options Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. under Other. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. click Yes. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Working with Revisions | 365 . ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Build Schedule. click Edit Family. select Bottom-up. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Edit. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. click Yes. Clear Blank row before data.

The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. open the titleblock family for editing. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. With a user-defined height. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select 90° Counterclockwise. under Other. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. click Edit. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Heading. for Height. When the height property is variable. 40 Select the revision schedule header. and on the Options Bar. and click Properties. select User defined. for Formatting. enter Rev. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. select the revision schedule. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. for Rotation on Sheet. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. right-click Revision Schedule. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab..

Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images. click Yes. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Load into Projects. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. text. 51 Save the file.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. double-click T . click Modify.rvt.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click to add text without a leader. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. for Leader. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. click Training Files. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo.Importing Image Files In this exercise. double-click T . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.JPG.

click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.doc text file in another window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. click Modify.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. with the new text box still selected. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 11 Save the file.

double-click A102 . 5 Click OK. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. for Name.Unit 18. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets. This process may vary from system to system. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Desktop. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.rvt. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click Modify. 12 Save the file.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.xls.JPG. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This step has been completed for you. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 4 Under Printer.JPG. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. for File name. click File menu ➤ Print. 10 On the Design Bar. type Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. select the document writer. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. This exercise demonstrates a common method. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.mdi. and click Save.

To effectively document this project. 371 . you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. called dependent views. or footprint.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

double-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Aviary. and the model crop is the interior crop region. under Level 2. The dependent view opens. under Floor Plans.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2. right-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . select the crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). click (Hide Crop Region).

14 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. 15 Select the crop region.10 Click in the drawing area. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. enter Level 2 . 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog.Labs. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes.

The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and on the Zoom flyout. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Modify. click Matchline. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Click in the drawing area. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views.

■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

click the Annotation Objects tab. select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name. 28 For Line Pattern. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and click Rename. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 27 Under Matchline. 33 In the Project Browser. click Level 2 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Unnamed. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Aviary.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Line Weight. select 9. and click OK. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .Aviary. right-click A101 . expand Sheets. and drag it onto the sheet.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. for Target view. click View Reference. 39 On the Options Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.35 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . under Floor Plans. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 .Aviary is selected. double-click Level 2. click Modify. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.

click Zoom To Fit. 44 On the Design Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. for Target view. click Modify. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .

48 Select the crop region.Aviary. double-click Level 2 . under Floor Plans. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 47 On the View Control Bar. right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . after modifying the annotation crop region.46 In the Project Browser. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 49 If. click (Show Crop Region).

Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. right-click Level 2. 55 On the Zoom flyout. under Floor Plans. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. select all views in the list. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Dependent Views. click Zoom To Fit. expand Level 1.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. but are not placed on sheets.

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click South Elevation. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 2 In the Project Browser. The matchline is already placed in the view.57 On the Zoom flyout. click Training Files. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.

for Name. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). 7 On the View Control Bar.Right. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. cropping the view to the aviary.The dependent view opens. 9 In the Project Browser. enter South Elevation .Left. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the view. enter South Elevation . for Name. cropping the view to the lab building. and click OK. expand South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. select the Crop Region. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Rename. right-click South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt. The perspective view displays. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and click Show Camera. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. and select the crop boundary. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and adjust the field of vision. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. as shown. double-click Site. Depending on camera placement. right-click 3D View 1. under Floor Plans. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. as necessary.3 Zoom out. If the camera is not shown in the view. in the Project Browser. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. With the camera shown.

8 In the Project Browser. 10 Save the file. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 Proceed to the next exercise.Day to open the view. and click OK. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.Day. enter Exterior . right-click 3D View 1.

you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. and render a daytime view of the exterior. You then duplicate the view. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Day.rvt. modify render settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. double-click Exterior .

under Background.Santa Monica. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox. and click Render. select Medium. In this case. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Setting.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You adjust cloud settings as required. NOTE If a background image is required. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. enter Spring Equinox . for Sun. 8 Under Quality. for New. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. and click Rename. You create a location and time for the rendering. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. select Edit/New. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). under Lighting. select Sky: Cloudy. 5 In the Rename dialog. 3pm.

After the image is rendered.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. Click Save. 10 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.9 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. click Export. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the rendering. click Desktop. For Files of type.

410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 25 Using the same method.Day. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . for Name.Night view open. 16 With the Exterior . click OK. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. under Group Options. press and hold SHIFT. and click OK.Night. under Group Options.Flat Round : 60W . select the first light. on the View Control Bar. verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click Dialog).Exterior .Flat Round : 60W .Day view to Exterior . click Render. 27 In the Rendering dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . for Scheme. enter Pool House Lights. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Ungrouped Lights. click New. and select the last light. and click Artificial Lights. click New. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and click OK. you duplicate the view and change the settings. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. for Name.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. To select a sequential list.120V to the Pool Lights group. dialog. 21 In the Light Groups dialog.Flat Round : 60W . right-click Exterior . and click Move to Group. add 30 :Sconce Light . 22 Using the same method.Flat Round : 60W . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. enter Pool Lights.Night. under Ungrouped Lights.120V. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. under Lighting. under 3D Views. and click OK.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

30 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. click Adjust Exposure. In this example. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. enter 4. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. click Show the model. under Image. 32 Save the file. the exposure can be modified to improve the output.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. for Exposure Value. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View on page 411.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. render the views.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Adding RPC People In this exercise. and finally. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt.

Exact placement is not important. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click Component. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and place the component inside the pool house. ■ (Rotate). 6 Select the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding RPC People | 413 . click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. the person’s line of sight. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. select RPC Female : YinYin. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered.

click Edit. click Edit/New. click Modify. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. you can enable this option. By default. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. select Cast Reflections.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Save the file. 13 On the Design Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. for Render Appearance Properties. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In order to see the figure’s reflection. under Parameters. 12 Click OK 3 times. on the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity.

Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps.

416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. under Extents. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 4 In the Project Browser. select Section Box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.The perspective view displays. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. under 3D Views.

double-click South. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. in addition to the 3D view. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). under Floor Plans. select the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box.

right-click. 13 In the South Elevation view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. select the section box. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view.

you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and curtain walls. doors that contain windows or glass. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. To create a daytime view. and render the interior view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 17 Save the file.

right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. under 3D Views.Night. You can specify a lower quality. 2 In the Rename View dialog. enter Interior . These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 7 Under Quality. clear Pool Lights. c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. select Interior: Artificial only. and click OK. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. After these settings are established. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 4 In the Rendering dialog. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . for Setting. for Scheme. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 5 Click Artificial Lights. select Draft. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under Lighting.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. you turn them off for this scene. 3 On the View Control Bar.

You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Copy To Custom.Santa Monica. The preset schemes are read-only. select Edit. and click OK. click 14 For Setting.9 Close the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser.Night. For sunlit interiors. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. in order to turn on daylight portals.Day. and click Render. the daylight portals can be turned on. 17 In the Rendering dialog. for Sun. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . select Region. select Curtain Walls. 13 In the Rendering dialog. In this case. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. you must create a custom setting. right-click Interior . For more information on daylight portals. for Scheme. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Spring Equinox . NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You create a view for the interior during the day. 3pm. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. but the space will receive standard daylighting. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. By default they are turned off. (Show Rendering Dialog). IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times.

Click OK. click Properties). View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. under Image.18 In the Rendering dialog. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. In the next steps. 20 In the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Show the model. and on the Options Bar. select the column on the right. enter 1. and close the Rendering dialog. For Saturation. enter 10. click Adjust Exposure.

Click OK. under Output Settings. and on the Options Bar. For Width. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select Scale (locked proportions). for Resolution. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. 28 In the Rendering dialog. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 26 Click Update Preview. click OK. For Rotate. As size and DPI are increased. select Based on wood grain. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. For Amount. 30 In the drawing area. select Wood. 24 In the Materials dialog. for Setting. click the dimensions for Size. select Unfinished. 23 With the column still selected. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click OK. the render time increases significantly. enter 5''. and click Render. enter 90. select Printer. You change the varnish setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select High. For Bump. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog.22 In the Element Properties dialog. select the crop boundary. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. clear Region. add a bump map to create texture.6.

A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. In a plan view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. or section view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also define it in a 3D.The rendered image displays. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. The walkthrough path is a spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Usually. elevation. independent of the Revit Architecture software.

verify that Perspective is selected. expand Views (all). and change unit formats as desired. If you prefer to use metric values. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and double-click 1st Floor. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. proceeds through the dining room. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.rvt. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Settings ➤ Project Units. click Training Files. click Walkthrough. and open Common\c_Townhouse. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and ends in the far corner of the living room.

expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. click Finish. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar.

Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . for Width. for Frame. enter 1. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. enter 9''. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). If it is not. and for Height. 16 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. 13 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 17 Click . enter 16''. 11 Under Change. on the Options Bar. verify that Field of view is selected. click Edit Walkthrough. and select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 14 Click . and click OK. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. and click OK. 12 On the View menu.

proceed to the next exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera.rvt. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. and click OK. double-click 1st Floor.The walkthrough plays. click (Element Properties). 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. c_Townhouse. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC. click Edit Walkthrough. under Floor Plans. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

7 Click the third key frame position. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and drag it to the location shown. select Path. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.

shading with edges. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. or rendering. click Edit Walkthrough. If you are unsure of what option to use. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 8 If you want to save this exercise. When you export the walkthrough. shading. and click Save. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. double-click Walkthrough 1. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. enter 15. c_Townhouse. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 3 Under Format. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. for Compressor. specifying the number of frames.rvt. and click OK. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. for Model Graphics Style. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. reducing the size of the image. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. for Frames/sec. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. on the Options Bar. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. hidden line. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . specify a path and a file name for the AVI. The walkthrough is recorded. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. select <Shading>. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 To play the walkthrough. under Output Length.

In this tutorial. 431 .Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. More specifically. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings.

1 In the Project Browser. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. click shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. click Camera. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.Creating a Solar Study . A 3D view is created. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. (SteeringWheels). 4 On the View toolbar. as shown.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.

4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu. click Save As. enter Solar Study . and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Modify. under Floor Plans. you create a section cutaway view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . right-click 3D View 1. expand 3D Views. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. as shown. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. click Section. if necessary. double-click 01 Entry. 3 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 7 In the Project Browser. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.5 On the Design Bar.Courtyard View.

434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .5 On the Design Bar. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 11 On the SteeringWheel. double-click the section head. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. right-click Section 1. and click OK. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. (SteeringWheels). 6 To view the section. 13 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. click Modify. click . and click Rename. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click 10 On the View toolbar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.

15 In the Rename View dialog. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Typical plan views. then Fine. 5 In the Project Browser. click . changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. In some cases. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click Save. as shown. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Callout. 6 In the Rename View dialog. clear Section Boxes. including the house. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. do not display many elements in 3D. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 16 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 To hide the section box. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. then select Medium. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. and click Rename. and click OK. 18 On the File menu. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. right-click {3D}. double-click 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view.

click Modify. as shown. 15 Select the Roof. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 On the Design Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.8 On the View toolbar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. click (SteeringWheels). 9 On the SteeringWheel. so you can see into the building from the top. 16 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway.

right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 18 In the Project Browser. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . and click OK. 21 On the File menu. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . under 3D Views.17 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. 19 In the Rename View dialog. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

click click OK. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. USA is selected. select Los Angeles. 3 Select Cast Shadows. CA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. expand 3D Views. USA. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. or multi-day solar study. and time. For the Single-Day solar study. . MA. You can create a still. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 9 In the Name dialog.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. single-day. you specify the location. Los Angeles. Click the Single-Day tab. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 2 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. date range. for City. click . leave the slider at 50. date. For this study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. expand Views (all). 4 For Sun Position.Creating Solar Studies . 10 Under Place. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. and click OK. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. For the Multi-Day solar study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. enter Summer Solstice. and time range.Boston. you specify the location. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. and click Duplicate.

16 In the Name dialog. click Save.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. Los Angeles is selected. click OK. select December 22. select Winter Solstice. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 19 On the File menu. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. enter Winter Solstice. under Frame. for Date. Under Frame. 6 On the View Control Bar. Clear Ground Plane at Level. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 2008.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . and click OK. 2008. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. 7 On the Options Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. and click OK. click OK. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. ■ For Time Interval. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . For Time Range. 8 On the Options Bar. for Sun Position. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 14 In this case. Los Angeles. enter 10 and press ENTER. click . 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. enter 20 and press ENTER. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select June 22.

click . click To display the next sequential frame. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. under Floor Plans. and click OK. for Sun Position. select Summer Solstice. double-click 01 Entry. . click Text. on the Single-Day tab. . Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. approximately as shown. click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . 14 On the Options Bar.■ To display the next key frame. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The solar study animation plays.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 13 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles.

click . as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Click and enter Dining. On the Options Bar. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click . approximately as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 6 On the View Control Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 8 For Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. expand 3D Views. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Lines. 5 In the Project Browser.

select Section Boxes. click OK.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 To hide the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15. as shown. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Los Angeles. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. under Output Length. select Summer Solstice. clear Section Boxes. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 14 Click outside of the section box. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. ■ For Frames per second. 12 In the drawing area. 11 To display the section box. if necessary. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and enter 5 to 50. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. and click OK. on the Single-Day tab. select Frame Range. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. On the Annotation Categories tab. select the section box.

2 On the View Control Bar. and enter 5 to 10. Under Format. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . verify that the value is set to 15. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. select Winter Solstice. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. under Output Length. or frame. verify that Hidden Line is selected. Los Angeles. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. you open each image. 3 For Sun Position.Los Angeles. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. Click OK. and click OK. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. To view the animation. for Compressor. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. for Model Graphics Style. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. of the animation separately. For File Name. For Files of Type. click . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. verify that Hidden Line is selected.■ ■ Under Format. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. enter 450 in the first field (width). 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. for Model Graphics Style. click OK. and click OK. For Frames per second.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. To maintain the proportions of the frame. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. select Frame Range. select AVI Files. For Dimensions.

Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. or any single-frame format. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In this example. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. or GIF.Los Angeles. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. click Save. For File name. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. such as JPEG. as shown: 9 On the File menu. enter 450 in the first field (width). select PNG. Click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. depending on the Frame Range. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. under 3D Views. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. 8 Click Save. BMP. click the Desktop icon. TIFF. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway .■ For Dimensions. For Files of Type. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .2 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . clear Section Boxes. For Time Interval. USA. 12 In the Name dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. and click OK. click the Multi-Day tab.Week Interval.Los Angeles . For Time. and on the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click OK. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select One week. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for File name enter 2pm .Boston. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 Select the roof. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. MA. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. for Sun Position. specify 2:00 pm. and click Duplicate.

15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click Save. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Click the Desktop icon. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. In the Length/Format dialog. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you mirror a project. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. and click OK. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. such as East . click OK.South. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. you mirror all model elements. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and annotations in non-drafting views.West or North . model views. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. for File Name. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. for Compressor. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Floor Plans. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click 01 Entry. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.

6 On the Standard toolbar. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. select East . View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. select the roof.West axis. Then. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. click OK. 5 In the warning dialog. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under 3D Views. right-click. 2 In the drawing area. For additional information. In this exercise.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. The project is mirrored along the East . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.West. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.

8 For Sun Position. For example. and click OK. Orienting to True North | 449 . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select Winter Solstice. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 For Sun Position.3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. specify 11:00 AM for time. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click the Still tab. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click Apply. click . select Cast Shadows. click . so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. on the Still tab. 12 Under Date and Time. 10 Under Date and Time. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. select Summer Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.

double-click 01 Entry. and click Properties. When a project is started. and click OK. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 For Sun Position. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. right click 01 Entry. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. click . click the Still tab. click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. select True North. click OK. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. and select Winter Solstice.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. This process establishes the view setting to True North. for Orientation. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. the view settings must be set for True North.

■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. as shown.

and click Rename. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click Properties. and click Element Properties. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. select True North Orientation. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. click . under 3D Views. 28 In the Project Browser. right-click. enter True North Orientation. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Apply. select Project North.23 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. click the Still tab. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select Summer Solstice. 32 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 01 Entry. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. right-click. select True North. 27 In the Rename View dialog.

under Format. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North | 453 . and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Los Angeles. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. for Dimensions. For File Name. Click OK. click the Desktop icon. enter 600 in the first field. click the Single-Day tab. for Compressor. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. For Files of Type. click Summer Solstice.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click Save.

The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. In this exercise. For Sun. select Edit/New. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. for Setting. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Date and Time. and click OK. click Render. select Medium.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Winter Solstice. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. select 12/22. under Settings. Under Lighting. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. select Interior: Sun only. capturing it. under Quality. under 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. Since a rendered image is temporary. and 2:00 PM. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. 1 In the Project Browser. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. for Scheme. under 3D Views. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Rendered views do not have this limitation. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In the Name dialog. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog).Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and exporting it as a JPEG image. 3 On the View Control Bar.

enter living area_winter solstice. and click OK. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 7 In the Save To Project dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Save to Project. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. For Files of type. click Export. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected.

456 .

Whether the audience is the general contractor. In this series of exercises. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. you explore the stylistic approach. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. a consultant. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. When organizing presentation graphics. and section boxes. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. Other tools in the software. an outside reviewer. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. or the client. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. They include rendering.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. and details. linework. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. In this tutorial. For the realistic approach. sections. advanced model graphics. type. Using the pre-built building model. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. elevations. you can choose between realism and stylistics. however. length. Co-house. 457 .

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . under Floor Plans. and click Rename. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. click Training Files. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click in the drawing area. exit the menu. and click OK. right-click 2nd Flr. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.

5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. click the Annotation Categories tab. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. dimensions. No annotations display in the view. UP Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Click OK. 7 Under Visibility.rvt. sections. and other annotations in this view. 11 In the Save As directory. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. navigate to the folder of your choice. expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Scale control and select 1:100. and Up Arrow. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and clear DOWN Text. and click Save. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. this represents the view getting smaller. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. elevations. Down Arrow. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise.

you can create. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Still tab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Boston. NOTE For this step. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. the darker the shadows. Cnst. and click OK. click . specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 6 Under Settings. The higher the number. ■ For Contrast. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. click (Shadows Off). Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 12 Click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. At that place. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date and Time. select By Date. Time and Place. click the Place tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 9 For City. specify 35. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. modify. however. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can select any city. and select 1st Flr. Within a project. select Cast Shadows. 7 For Place. If you select a different city. For Sun Position. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . 1:00 PM. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. specify 10/27. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. MA.

click (Shadows On). you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. under Settings.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. clear Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. for Sun Position. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. . 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.

and click View. and notice the view title.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. 4 In the Views dialog. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Modify. and click to place it. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Sheet. select Arch Portrait.

you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. and click OK. under Graphics. For this analytique. 12 In the Name dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. for Show Title. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. enter Presentation. To accomplish this. and click Activate View. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. click . click Duplicate.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. select No.

You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. and select Chain. click Region Properties. When you finish drawing the chain. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. click Filled Region. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 18 On the Options Bar. fill properties. click . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 22 On the Design Bar. and the boundary of the region. If necessary. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click Edit/New. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 17 In the Type Selector. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . select Invisible lines. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type.

29 In the Element Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Graphics. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Solid Black. and click OK.24 In the Type Properties dialog. click . under Identity Data. select Solid fill. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 30 On the Design Bar. for Fill Pattern. click Duplicate. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. enter Presentation. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Name dialog. click OK. scroll down. and click View Properties. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. for Sheet Name.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .rvt. right-click South. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.

and clear Elevation Swing. click (Shadows Off). This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. click . click in the Walls row. 12 Under Shadow. on the Model Categories tab. click OK. and click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 14 For Sun Position. 18 For Time. and click Rename. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. exit the menu. and click OK. under Visibility. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. enter Presentation South Elevation. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. and click OK. clear Visible. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Elevations. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.2 In the Project Browser. 13 For Contrast. under Visibility. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. click Override. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Time and Place. 11 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 35. specify 2:30 PM. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 9 Click OK. select By Date. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Settings. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click Copy of South. under Pattern Overrides. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Duplicate. By changing the angle of the sun. click in the drawing area. scroll up. select Cast Shadows. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . click Add View. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 3 In the Views dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. double-click A105 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Presentation. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar.

Adjust the controls to modify the extents. 4 Add the section shown below. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. select 1: 100. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Cnst. for Scale. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Flr. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).

7 On the Options Bar. and double-click Section 2.Section 2 is added to the building model. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . To accomplish this. select 1 : 100. this view needs to be rotated 180°. click Callout. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. as shown. To fit correctly in the analytique. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. expand Sections (Callout 1).

click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. clear Visible. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Section 2. expand the Doors category. right-click Callout of Section 2. click in the Walls row. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 15 Under Visibility. and click Rename. 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. scroll up. click Modify. and clear Elevation Swing.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click the Model Categories tab. under Pattern Overrides. under Sections (Callout 1). 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 17 Under Visibility. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 22 On the View Control Bar. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 .■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop region. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 20 Click OK. (Hide Crop Region). click The crop regions no longer display. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region.

In the steps that follow. in the Project Browser. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. ■ For Sun Position. click . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. In addition. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Click Apply.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. The shadows do not offer much contrast. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and click Advanced Model Graphics. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. click OK. NOTE The line style. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Altitude. for Silhouette style. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. For Azimuth. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . was added to this training file for training purposes. specify 135°. select Silhouette Edges. select Directly. Silhouette Edges. and click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 70°. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Select Relative to View. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Shadows On). Click OK.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. under Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Views dialog.Presentation. click Add View. and click to place the selected view. select Section: Presentation Section 2.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

select Viewport : Presentation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. Using a clock as a reference. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.5 In the Type Selector. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. In the steps that follow. you click to specify the start radius. double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1). you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. The view title no longer displays. click Modify. click (Rotate). 9 On the Edit toolbar. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and press Enter. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. The section needs to be rotated 180°.

Presentation. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°.

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Modify. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. After applying the view template to a new section view. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

3 In the New View Template dialog. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation. click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 6 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1).rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1.

double-click A105 . 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click Add View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under Names. and click Deactivate View. and click OK. 18 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. The furniture. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. annotations. for Rotation on Sheet.Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog. under Graphics. 15 Right-click the viewport. lighting fixtures. and click Add View to Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select Presentation. and elevation swings no longer display. 14 In the Type Selector. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . under Sheets (all). select 90° Counterclockwise. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Viewport : Presentation. and click Activate View. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. traditional analytiques contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.

4 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . double-click Section 1. select the callout. click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. click Callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head.

double-click Presentation Callout. as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Extents. under Sections (Callout 1). 7 Select the crop region. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click View Properties. enter Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible.5 In the Rename View dialog. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click. 6 In the Project Browser.

specify 22. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout.Presentation. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation. click Modify. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. For Scale Value 1. and click Add View to Sheet. select Custom. click Add View. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . and click Activate View.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

The composition set for the analytique is now complete. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. In the steps that follow. activate the viewport. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Edit/New. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. click Filled Region. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and click Deactivate View. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. click Region Properties. and move it to the position shown below. When finished. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout.

click Filled Region. and click OK 3 times. click Finish Sketch.Presentation. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Solid fill. double-click A105 . on the Design Bar. When you are finished. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. for Fill Pattern. 28 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click . 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. under Sheets (all).

click (Show Crop Region). 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 32 On the Design Bar. click . 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Finish Sketch.31 On the Options Bar. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 34 Select the crop region. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . click (Hide Crop Region). 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click Deactivate View. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save.

492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and click 1 : 200. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. double-click Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and apply shadows to the views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click the Scale control.rvt.

Select 1st Flr. For Contrast. double-click Isometric 2. in the list. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. select Section Box. under Extents. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. Cnst. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. specify 135°. for Silhouette style. under 3D Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. under 3D Views. For Sun Position. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. select Directly. 8 In the Name dialog. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. Click OK. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Select Relative to View. right-click Isometric. and click OK. enter Isometric 1.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Duplicate. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. For Altitude. For Azimuth. specify 35. specify 45°. Select Ground Plane at Level. select Cast Shadows. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. A section box displays around the building model. and click OK. and click Rename. enter Isometric 2.

click Modify on the Design Bar. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. as shown. Grips display on each face of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you are finished.19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor.

enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views. Next. 24 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 23 In the Rename View dialog. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you can adjust the plane location. 22 In the Project Browser. select Viewport : Presentation. If desired. right-click Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar.Presentation. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. On the Annotation Categories tab. double-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . make a copy of the view. 27 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click Rename. 31 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. double-click Isometric 3. the stairs and railings may display. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 25 To hide the section box. 29 To hide the section box. under Sheets (all).Before turning off the visibility of the section box. clear Section Boxes. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click A105 . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box.

In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. The filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector.

click Lines. 41 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Concrete. click Edit/New. On the Options Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fill Patterns. 42 Using the drawing tools. 39 For Background. 35 Select the poche filled region. click Edit. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 40 Click OK twice. The image below shows the redrawn lines. and click Activate View. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 36 On the Design Bar. select Transparent.

45 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 47 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice.43 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Region Properties. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Finish Sketch.

a cutaway perspective view.rvt. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. then you specify the eye direction and range. under Floor Plans. The view opens immediately. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 .Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you create the final view for the analytique. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35. select Cast Shadows. For Sun Position. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name. select Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. for Silhouette style. click . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . under Extents.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK. select Section Box. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the section box.

Because scale does not apply to perspective views. clear Section Boxes. 21 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 17 Under Model Crop Size. under Sheets (all). and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. double-click A105 .Presentation. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. click Size. enter 165 mm. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Width. On the Annotation Categories tab. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 19 To hide the section box. under Change.14 Select the crop region. In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. you must specify the actual size of the image.

10 In the Name dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select a font. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. under Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. enter Title. click . 9 In the Type Properties dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Text : Title. select the same font as the title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify a text size of 6 mm.rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . enter Description. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Duplicate. under Text. click OK. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Text. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. specify a text size of 40 mm. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Modify. select Text : Description.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Type Selector. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. and roofs. that compose the building. curtain walls. In this tutorial. After you import the SketchUp model.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. such as walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. you create a small building from the front mass form. 507 . You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

select Auto-Detect. under Template file. For Files of type. or select from a list. For Layers. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . enter SketchUp Model. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. and click Save. click Browse. you create a Revit Architecture project. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Colors. 6 In the Save As dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project.skp. for File name. select SketchUp Files. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select All. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 2 In the New Project dialog. and not in the library. select Preserve. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. visible elements. For Import units. enter Import SketchUp. click OK.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. click the Massing tab. 9 In the informational dialog. click Create Mass. click Training Files. buildings. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rte. Double-click the Common folder. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Click the Sketchup file. and click OK. click OK. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family.

For Place at level. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. depending on the complexity of the project. Click Open. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. In a new project. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building.Center. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . Level 1 is the only choice. 14 On the View toolbar. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. 17 In the warning dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. click the Close button. such as walls. curtain walls. select Level 1. select Manual . click Finish Mass. click .

3 In the Type Selector. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. click Roof by Face. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. for Level. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. select the face so that it highlights in red. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.18 Proceed to the next exercise. After you create the building from the mass faces. and on the View Control Bar. verify Basic Roof: Generic . You turn their visibility off to view only the building. such as walls. curtain walls. and roofs. 4 On the Options Bar. verify Level 2 is selected. that compose the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .400mm displays.

click Create Roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. click to display masses. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. A roof is created from the mass face. To see the new roof. on the Options Bar. on the View toolbar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.

11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create Roof.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

click roofs that you created. click Modify to end the command. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.200mm displays. select Core Face: Exterior. 16 On the View toolbar. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 21 On the Design Bar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . for Loc Line. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 22 In the Type Selector. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 23 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face.

Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 25 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System by Face. click to view only the walls and roofs. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 26 Click to redisplay the masses.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 28 In the Type Selector.

30 On the Options Bar. 32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 31 Using the same technique. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Roof by Face. select the other wall. click Wall by Face. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create Roof. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Curtain System. and on the Options Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. and select it. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .35 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. and on the Options Bar. click Create System. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar.

46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. and select the mass face shown below. specify a point to place the camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. click Wall by Face. click Camera. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . Below the right corner of the view. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. double-click Level 1. 42 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans.

518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click your building in the view.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 48 On the View toolbar. roofs. specify a point for the camera target. to view only the walls. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Click the frame to display its grips. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. as shown. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 2 Pattern. click Modify. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. for Justification.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click . and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. for Justification. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. select Center.

62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . double-click {3D}. and click Cancel to end the command. under 3D Views. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. double-click 3D View 1. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. under 3D Views. and move the roof edges as shown below. 59 On the View toolbar. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Door.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 63 In the Type Selector. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you need to change the length of the wall. and they are not windows. you create a curtain system using the wall command. To switch panel types. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. Like walls. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. panel. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. This affects the entire curtain system. Unlike windows. 525 . You can add curtain systems with the wall command. grid lines. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Like windows. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. to resize the system.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. To change grids. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you need to select a panel. and mullions. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. For example.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Wall.rvt. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Training Files. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 1 In the Project Browser. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

enter 1200. and room bounding. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. using curtain grids. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click (Properties). You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. Click OK. top and base attachments. For Top Offset.

16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Elevation. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 25 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . and click Rename. and click OK. right-click Elevation 1 . 18 In the Project Browser.a. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. click Modify.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

26 While pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. THIRD FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. while pressing CTRL. and click OK. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. FIFTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. Click to place another grid line. SIXTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar.

you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and on the Options Bar. The two segments are removed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.Next. Instead of using the Door command. and then select the segment above it. The segment line style changes to dashed. Creating an Entrance | 531 . and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.

and lock them. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click Curtain Grid.38 Using the same method. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

Use the following image as a guide. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 43 Delete the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. Creating an Entrance | 533 . click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click in any white space to exit the editor.

56 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 57 On the View Control Bar. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 55 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next.Next. 54 On the Design Bar. click view. not as curtain panels. The panel changes to a double door. on the new curtain system you added. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Now. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. . double-click Entrance Elevation. under Floor Plans. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel.rfa. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 52 On the Type Selector. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. and click Wireframe. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click Training Files. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. They are part of the curtain panel category. These panels schedule as doors. under Elevations.

Creating an Entrance | 535 . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 65 On the View Control Bar. click System Panel : Solid. and the solid panels display in white. The glazed panels display in blue. click . 63 Click OK twice. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel.60 On the Type Selector. 61 With the panel still selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel.

5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Grid Line Segment. click Mullion. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Save As.68 On the File menu. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar.

6 On the Options Bar. 10 Delete the mullions below them. You are going to change some mullion joins. clickModify. because their width reduces the size of the doors. select All Empty Segments. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. however. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. there are a few that you do not want. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 .

double-click Southeast Isometric. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 14 Click the top mullion control. 17 Save the file. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. you can also right-click. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. click Modify. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 Click the lower mullion join control.Two mullion join controls display. Finally. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. (Arc passing through three points). for Top Constraint. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. double-click GROUND FLOOR. For Top Offset.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Finally. 1 In the Project Browser. Curved Curtain System | 539 . enter 1200. under Floor Plans. 7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side.

10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. and then sixteenths. eighths. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. double-click East. under Elevations. Next. click Curtain Grid. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. you place grids on the system.

select the bottom layer of panels. Next. 16 On the Design Bar.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.300mm. 18 In the Type Selector. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . to filter out all 19 Save the file. select Basic Wall: Generic . Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you change some panels in the system. click Modify.

for Depth. 9 Select the extrusion.rft. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. and click . under Elevations. clear Chain. . and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Training Files. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. enter 100. 11 On the Design Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 8 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Model Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar.

All fourth floor panels are selected. click Modify. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and click Change Walls Orientation. select Curtain Panel . (SteeringWheels). 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 19 In the Project Browser.rfa family. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 21 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View toolbar.Pattern. and return to the project file. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. right-click. click 25 On the View toolbar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. under Floor Plans.14 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and save the family as Curtain Panel .Pattern. 23 Right-click. click (Default 3D View).Pattern.rfa. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .

select System Panel . right-click. 30 Save the file. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the solid panel. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .Solid. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

click Training Files. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Elevations. For vertical mullions. click Lines. and enter 50 mm for the radius. . Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click ■ ■ For Sides. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. double-click East. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . select Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Select Radius. for Profile Usage. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and click OK. and select it. Click again to specify the ending point. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).rft. click Mullion. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. enter 8.

26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. clear Coarse and Medium. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click Modify. click Modify. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. clear Fine. and return to the project file. 31 Click .rfa.rfa family. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under 3D Views. it can be added as a mullion type. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 27 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and click OK. click Mullion. and click Visibility. 17 On the Design Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 13 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Detail Component. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 28 On the View toolbar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click OK.rfa. click (SteeringWheels). click Training Files.11 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 20 Select the detail component.detail. After the new profile is loaded.

You have placed more mullions than you want. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 43 Press DELETE. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. click Modify. double-click GROUND FLOOR. so you remove the unwanted ones. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . right-click. for Profile. 40 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 41 In the Project Browser. 37 Click OK twice. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select All Empty Segments. 36 Under Construction. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. select Circular Mullion for Family. 38 On the Options Bar. 44 Save the file.32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 33 Click Edit/New.

6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. under Floor Plans. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. a storefront system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 5 On the Options Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and a ruled curtain system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. and you can click to select them all. and press TAB. click Pick Walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. double-click TOP OF ROOF. In this lesson. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. select Defines slope. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight.

select Entire Grid Line. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Project Browser. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. 18 Save the file. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. enter 600. Click OK. click Roof Properties. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Mullion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. under 3D Views. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 On the Design Bar.

550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. select Unconnected for Height. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and enter 2400. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.Storefront System In this exercise. click Wall. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.

and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. Storefront System | 551 . click Modify. under 3D Views. enter 10200 mm. even if the wall height changes. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. click Edit/New. To see how the grid layout is defined. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. For this wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. double-click Southeast Isometric. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. which is specified in the type. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. and click . The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters.

under 3D Views. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 1 In the Project Browser. By setting the Angle value. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. and Offset. 20 Save the file. 19 Select a curtain grid. you find Number. click Mullion. select All Empty Segments. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. or end. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. see the Revit Architecture help. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. In this exercise. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. Justification. center. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. enter 15. 16 Click OK. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Angle.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 6 Click the highlighted line.

11 Click OK. A panel between the 2 lines is created.8 Select the highlighted line. click Curtain Grid. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. click Modify. Next. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 9 On the Design Bar. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. and click . 10 Select the panel.

Curtain System by Lines | 555 . In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 18 Save the file. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 16 In the Type Selector. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. Finally. embed a curtain system inside another wall. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system. quarters.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. select System Panel : Solid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. and then eighths. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. right-click. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.

556 .

In this lesson. gutters. In addition. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. gable.Roofs 15 In this lesson. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. and soffits to the roofs that you create. and low sloped roofs. 557 . you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. mansard. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. Before you can sketch the roof profile. shed. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this exercise. you learn to create several different types of roofs. including hip. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 4 Click OK. centerline. and double-click Level 1. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof.rvt. and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. click Training Files. and click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and open Metric\m_Roofs. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. select Name. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click the blue square on the witness line.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face.

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. click Lines. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction.Next. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.

23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press TAB. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and select the second wall. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. press CTRL. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . click Modify. 21 In the Project Browser. Next. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 18 Select the edge of the roof. expand Sections (Type 1). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 19 On the Tools toolbar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Views (all). and double-click Section 1. and then select the exterior face of the wall.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 26 On the View toolbar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. click model.

You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. and double-click Garage Roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . sketch the roof footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). m_Roofs. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Yes. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. click the model. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. and click OK. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. select both slope definition lines. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 When you see the informational dialog.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. clear Defines slope. click (Properties). click Finish Roof. under Dimensions. 11 Press CTRL. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 15 On the View toolbar. and on the Options Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. By default. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Modify.

and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 3. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and enter 600 for Overhang. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. clear Defines slope.rvt. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. press TAB. m_Roofs. When you complete the roof. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Modify. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 17 When you see the informational dialog.6 Click to select all the walls. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click (Rectangle). 15 On the Options bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Lines. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines slope.18 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all).rvt. m_Roofs. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls.

close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Next. click Lines. and click (Pick Lines). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. Next. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. clear Defines Slope. select the left vertical slope definition line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 11 To trim the first line segment. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. click (Trim/Extend). 9 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 10 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 7 On the Options Bar.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.

click (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . Next. 17 On the View toolbar. 14 Under Constraints.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and click OK.

21 Click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 23 On the Tools toolbar. join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.

click Pick Walls. and double-click Level 2. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch.rvt. m_Roofs. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 9 On the Options Bar.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 10 To trim the first line segment. press TAB. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. clear Defines Slope. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. and enter 300 for Overhang. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. select the left vertical roof line. 4 On the Options Bar. Next. expand Floor Plans. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 0 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar.

and double-click 3D. and press ENTER. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 On the View toolbar. Next. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Roof Properties. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. (SteeringWheels). click 20 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). m_Roofs. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you add a slope-defining line. 1 In the Project Browser.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 16 Under Constraints. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. select Defines slope. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. expand 3D Views. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.

click Split Walls and Lines. To help locate the position of each split. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . clear Defines Slope. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. add two new slope arrows. 3 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow. click (Pick Lines). change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. Before you can add slope arrows. 9 On the Tools menu.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. expand Floor Plans. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 4 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. you need to add two reference planes. Next. click Modify. and enter 600 for Offset. Next. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 14 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.

1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. expand Views (all). When you sketch a hip roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 16 Repeat steps 13 . and double-click Garage Roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click OK. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When eave heights differ. and click 19 Under Constraints. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to place the arrow. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof.15 to add the second slope arrow. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Edit. enter 500 for Rise/1000. m_Roofs. click Modify.rvt. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the adjacent eave heights must align. (Properties). Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. select both slope arrows. select Slope for Specify. 20 Under Dimensions. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. The eave lines display with a dimension. select Defines Slope. click Finish Roof. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When aligning eaves. and click OK. Next. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. on the Options Bar. (Properties). Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. under Dimensions. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 14 If you want to save your changes. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the File menu.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 5 On the Options Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select a method to align the eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Align Eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

(Properties). click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. under Constraints. and double-click North. on the Options Bar. click Modify. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 3 Select the roof and.rvt. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. expand Elevations. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser.

and double-click Level 3. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). and then select Defines slope.6 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and select the remaining three lines. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 7 In the Project Browser. Next. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and click OK. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB. under Dimensions. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Finish Roof. click Lines. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click .

You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click mansard roof.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click Save As.17 On the View toolbar. After you add the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Training Files. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you add a roof to a building shell.

double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 5 In the drawing area. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 3 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.

select Steel Truss . and click OK. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click (Trim/Extend). 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Because the walls are not continuous. click Finish Roof.EPDM. for Type.Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

In the next steps.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. 16 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. The roof has been created. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. and click to select it. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head to open the section view. click (Draw Split Lines).

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. and select a point on the opposite roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down. move the cursor horizontally to the left.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method.

23 On the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. In this exercise. exact placement of the points is not important. on the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. You modify the points individually. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. (Add points). Next. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 .

enter -2''. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 25 Using the same method. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. and press ENTER. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

and select all of the roof edges.27 Press and hold CTRL. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. including the interior edges of the roof regions. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . enter 4''. 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). and press ENTER. for Elevation.

The slab has not responded exactly as intended. under Construction. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. By making the insulation layer variable. for the Thermal/Air Layer. Creating Fascia. and Soffits on page 586. on the File menu. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. After you create a roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. click Edit. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Gutters. gutters. 36 View the results in the section view. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits In this lesson. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits in Revit Architecture. gutters. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Save As. select Variable. The entire slab is sloped. for Structure. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. you can easily create its fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Gutters. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. and soffits. Creating Fascia.

3 Press CTRL.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click OK twice.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and open Common\c_Condominium. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Construction. click Training Files. enter Built-up Fascia. click Training Files. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Open. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 8 In the Name dialog.

588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 13 On the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. c_Condominium.rvt. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click (Properties). Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Gutters on page 588. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.

5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Duplicate. under Construction. Creating Gutters | 589 .3 In the Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK three times. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 10 Click to place the gutter. Creating Soffits on page 590. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. . 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and click OK. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.

expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and double-click Roof. expand Views. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. click Pick Roofs. c_Condominium. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

expand Views (all). 8 Select the roof. 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Join Geometry. click Finish Sketch. 6 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 591 .

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. For Unit Suffix. If you are using metric units. click Training Files. select Millimeters. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. under Length. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. In the final exercise. Click OK. your values will be different. 593 . select mm.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. click Project Units. Finally. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. 2 In the Project Units dialog. and open Common\c_Area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.

594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . For Unit Suffix. and click Room and Area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Square meters. click OK. click Settings. For Rounding. Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. expand Floor Plans. select m2. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. it is not necessary in this exercise. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click the Room Calculations tab. right-click in the Design Bar. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. click the Area Schemes tab. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. expand Views (all). Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. or 0. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.3 Under Area. select 2 decimal places. These schemes define spatial relationships.

Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). When you select Yes in this dialog. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 13 In the Project Browser. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. If you select No. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. 12 When the informational dialog displays.You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. forming a closed loop. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you must manually add these boundary lines. under Views (all). NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. click Area Plan. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . rather than the area tag. you must select one of the reference lines. To modify the area. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. 9 Click Cancel.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. common areas. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Next. click Area Boundary. and store area. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). click Area Plan. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 21 On the Options Bar. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Click OK. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall.

and click to select the area. click ■ . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click Area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. When you pick the walls. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify. you can either draw them or pick them. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. If you do not select this option. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 23 On the Design Bar.When you add area boundary lines.

Select Office area for Area Type.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Click OK. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . click ■ ■ ■ . 29 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. click Area. In the Element Properties dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.■ Click OK.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 37 On the File menu. name the project Area-in progress. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. and click to place the legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. click Color Scheme Legend. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type.rvt. In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

and click OK. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Areas (Rentable).3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. click the Fields tab. under Category. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

In this tutorial. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. floor. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and perimeter information. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. 603 . You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. If you modify a massing face. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. or both. you then need to update the building face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. After you make building elements. At any time. and floors. floors. You assign the default wall. roofs. you can specify the view to display massing elements. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After creating mass floors. building elements. and roofs. volume.

and cutting geometry. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Massing. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all). right-click anywhere over the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. sweeps. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. click Training Files. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Create Mass. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing .

8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter 25000. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and click . click (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. for Offset. click 18 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 15 On the View Control Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 10 In the Materials dialog. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 13 On the View toolbar. click Lines. for Name. and click OK. double-click Level 1. click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. enter 1550 mm. 16 On the Design Bar. (Line). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . under Materials and Finishes. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Lines. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. for Extrusion End. select Mass (Opaque). This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. (Pick Lines). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click OK.

for Extrusion Start. TIP If necessary. click Extrusion Properties. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. and click OK. for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. enter 25000. under Views (all). and click . double-click {3D} to see the results. click the value for Material.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click OK. 23 In the Materials dialog. enter 27500. under Elevations (Building Elevation). The second form is on top of the first form. 21 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Constraints. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. highlight the larger form. for Extrusion End. select Pick a plane. 26 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). under Materials and Finishes. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. double-click West. click Finish Sketch. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 30 In the drawing area.

37 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and on the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click (Arc passing through three points). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and click to select the line start point. click (Draw). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . and clear Chain.31 Click to select the face. (Pick Lines). Next. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.

40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Project Browser. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 39 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Edit Top. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 46 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and delete the vertical construction line. click (Move). 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. double-click East. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. (Line). click Modify. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.TIP If you do not see this option. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all).

and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In the next exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 52 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click (Default 3D View). and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. click Blend Properties. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 53 On the View toolbar. (Arc passing through three points). click 49 Create an arc as shown.48 On the Options Bar. for Material.

7 Using the same technique.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 2 In the drawing area. click Lines. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. select the mass. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 1 In the Project Browser. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. double-click Level 1. click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options bar. 9 On the Design Bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted.rvt. under Floor Plans. click (Line). and select Chain. m_Massing_Start. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar.

click (Default 3D View). you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. When sketching each extrusion. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. snap the corners to the intersections. for Extrusion End. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click Finish Sketch. enter 0.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 15 Click OK. on the View Control Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. In this exercise. 14 Under Constraints. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Extrusion Properties. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. ■ For the radius. m_Massing_Start. click Sketch 2D Path. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).rvt. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. and click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. select a point below the mass elements. double-click Level 1.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 4 On the Options Bar.

verify that <By Sketch> is selected. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. 8 On the Design Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. 11 On the Options Bar. click Profile 1. 9 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Path. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click (Rectangle). as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 .Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass.

) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Profile 2. click (Align). as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click Finish Profile. and press ESC.13 On the Tools toolbar. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.

Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Materials dialog.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . click Finish Profile. click Finish Swept Blend. select Mass (Transparent). 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. under Materials and Finishes. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click <By Category>.

You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Finally. click Finish Mass. you create new family types from a mass family file. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing .24 On the Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. In this exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.rvt.

and click Apply.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. click Family Types. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 18000 mm. for Height. 6 For Width. for Width. for Depth. for Depth. and click OK. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog. In this exercise. 8 For Width. click Training Files. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . 3 In the Name dialog. enter 6000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and for Name. enter 11000 mm. for Height. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 7 Click New. 5 Click New. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 12000 mm. enter 46000mm. and click Apply. enter 15000mm. and click Apply. click New. and for Name. for Height. enter 68000 mm. enter 9000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. under Other.rfa. 11 Save the file as Box-Training.rfa. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 9 Click OK.

on the View toolbar. You also load other existing mass families and place them. Arc Dome.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 6 Open the Box-Training. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. under Views (all). Semi Barrel Vault.rfa.rfa family files. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. and Triangle. click Training Files. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. click Place Mass. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 1 If not already selected. 2 In the Project Browser. as shown. double-click Site. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 8 In the Type Selector. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

25 In the drawing area. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click (Element Properties). 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. enter 90 for Angle. click Place Mass. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. click Modify.10 On the Design Bar. select the triangle. specify Mass (Opaque). 20 In the Type Selector. as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click OK twice. click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. select Rotate after placement. select the 3 boxes. and click to place the mass. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). and click (Element Properties). 17 Press CTRL. 14 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the box. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice.

and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent).26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. for the Material parameter. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 29 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). 33 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Opaque). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. click Place Mass.

Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. (Join Geometry). click 2 On the Tools toolbar.rvt file. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements | 621 . In the next exercise. In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.

4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Views (all). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror).

16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 .8 On the Options Bar. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. as shown. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click (Default 3D View). (Join Geometry). enter SM. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and then select the triangle. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. for Axis.

1 On the Design Bar. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). and select the triangle mass element. do not clear the check mark. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. (If Design Options is already selected. you joined mass elements together. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click Modify. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design.

8 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. and click OK. select Rotate after placement. 17 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 14 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). click Modify. for Angle. click Place Mass. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. enter 90. clear Curved. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 7 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. for the Material parameter. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. specify Mass (Transparent). 13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. select Sloped (primary). double-click Site.

under 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK twice. and watch the status bar. TIP To find the correct shapes. double-click {3D}. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. clear Sloped. and click (Element Properties). 22 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. While pressing CTRL. select Curved. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. double-click North. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Elevations. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. click Modify.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click (Add to Design Option Set). select the three arc domes.

33 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. and click OK. In this exercise. click the Design Options tab. 34 Close the warning that displays.rvt. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. and click Close. 32 On the Design Options toolbar.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Make Primary. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . select Curved from the Design Option menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. 35 On the File menu. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved and. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you can make it the primary option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click (Design Options).

TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. 5 In the Type Selector. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Wall by Face. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. click (Pick Faces). 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and for Loc Line.rvt. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. select Basic Wall: Exterior . and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Brick on CMU. select Wall Centerline.

double-click Level 5. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 12 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 On the Design Bar. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. under Floor Plans. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. click Wall by Face. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click Level 9. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 19 In the Project Browser. If desired.18 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Views (all). 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red.

The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 .In this exercise. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. select all levels. 6 On the Options Bar. volume. under Views (all).rvt. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Modify. and Walls. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. double-click {3D}. and click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. perimeter. When you select levels. click Mass Floors. clear Curtain Panels. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 4 Click OK. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 8 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. click Mass Floors. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 13 On the Design Bar.

17 In the Mass Floors dialog.14 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK.

rvt. select Mass Floor. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. under Available fields. and select Level. and click Add. 4 Using the same method. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. The Floor Area. select Floor Area. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Floor Perimeter. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. under Category.In this exercise. Floor Volume. press and hold SHIFT. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. enter Retail. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. for Sort by. and click OK. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Usage. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. select Mass: Family and Type. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 .5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule.

636 | Chapter 17 Massing . 13 With Usage selected. select Mass: Family and Type. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. and click Remove. 14 Select Level. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. under Other. click Edit. expand Schedules/Quantities. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. After you assign usage.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Move Up until Level is listed second. for Fields.

enter Retail (instead of Hotel). and click OK. 16 On the Formatting tab. under Fields. select Floor Area. for Filter. and select Grand totals. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 18 On the Filter tab. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. select Usage. select Level. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 24 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. enter Hotel. for Filter by. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. click Edit. under Other. and click Rename. 23 In the Rename View dialog.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. for Sort by. for Field formatting. elevation. and plan views. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click Properties. in the field under Filter by. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and in the field below. 19 Click OK twice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. and click OK. 27 Click OK twice. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. for Then by. 22 In the Project Browser. under Other.

3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. The mass floor schedules list. you created mass floor schedules. click Roof by Face.rvt. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. floor perimeter. under Views (all). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. by level.In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. the floor area. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.400mm. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown.

In this exercise. click Create Roof. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 13 Using the same method. and click OK. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Sloped Glazing. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.8 Using the method you just learned. and Walls. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Curtain Panels. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. Curtain Systems. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. in the Type Selector. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.

double-click {3D}.rvt. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create System. 5 Press CTRL. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). click Curtain System by Face. verify that Select Multiple is selected. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System.9 On the Options Bar.

Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .12 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt.

8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Next. Roofs.1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. for Width. and then click OK. clear Curtain Panels. Curtain Systems. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. double-click Site. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and Walls. click Modify. clear Exclude Design Options. and click (Element Properties). enter 30000. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Floors. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all).

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. double-click Level 1. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 11 In the Project Browser. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all).10 Open the 3D view to see the result.

TIP To select the curtain wall. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 17 Select the roof as shown. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). click Remake. click OK. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. click Remake. and click Remake.

20 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you changed the size of an existing mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. 1 Open the 3D view. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.rvt. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.

6 On the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Massing only. under 3D Views. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 4 Rename the view 3D . click All to select all categories. right-click {3D}. 9 Select Mass. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 8 Click None to clear the selection. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.The 3D view now shows only the building shell.

such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. If desired. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. to the building shell.

652 .

Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. After you create a model group. Modifying. You mirror one instance of the group. hotel rooms. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. or with those working on a different project. When you make changes to a nested group. Creating. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you not only simplify their placement. For example. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. 653 . and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and typical office layouts. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You can also nest groups within other groups. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. In another exercise. By grouping objects. you add the new model group to a previously created group. place. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you also simplify the modification process. In this exercise. the host group is also updated automatically. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. In this tutorial. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and modify repetitive units. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. The new group is considered nested within the host group.

2 Click in the drawing area. expand Views (all). click Training Files. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan.rvt. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. and double-click First Floor.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar.

10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click Typical Kitchen. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. under Groups.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand Model. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. click (Mirror). 15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .14 On the Edit toolbar. clear Copy. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

and one rotated. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. one mirrored. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. as shown.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images.

Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Modifying a Group | 661 . click Save As. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. When you finish editing. press TAB to highlight the wall. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.

NOTE To display an excluded element. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.3 Click (Group Member.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. press TAB. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the door. and click to select the wall.).). 7 Click (Group Member.). 8 On the Design Bar. and click member to group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. click Modify. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. press TAB. select the element.

select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Modifying a Group | 663 . 15 On the Options Bar. move the cursor to the left.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 14 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 10 In the Type Selector. click Wall.127mm. click Door.

and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. In edit group mode. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. move the cursor up. 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. click Edit Group. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

under Constraints. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. which acts as the host. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. and click OK. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click Finish.25 On the Design Bar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. (Element Properties). 26 Select the opening. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups | 665 . enter 2134. and on the Options Bar. enter 1000. click Modify. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click 28 For Base Offset. created in an earlier lesson.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. click Edit Group. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. select the Typical Kitchen group.rvt. 5 In the drawing area. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor.

and each of the bifold doors. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 667 . select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.

In the next exercise. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. double-click First Floor. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and filled regions. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to a group.rvt. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. such as door and window tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 .

and click OK. click (Group). and on the Design Bar. as shown. 16 In the drawing area. click to add an arc leader. 12 Enter Tile. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 9 On the Options Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Modify. and select the text note and the filled region. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Edit toolbar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

under Groups. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. and click Create Instance. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Because the detail group contains variables. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.18 On the Design Bar.

clear Leader. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. as shown. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. double-click First Floor. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.manner that a drawing component can be added. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify.

enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. double-click Second Floor. 11 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . 8 In the Filter dialog.7 On the Options Bar. for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click Check None. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. select Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). click (Group).

you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. therefore. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 On the Design Bar. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Modify. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. and click OK.

expand Groups. under Groups\Model. 3 For File name.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. and click Create Instance. verify that Project is selected. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 5 In the New Project dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. for Create new. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. verify that Same as group name is selected. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. accept the default template file. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. A warning dialog displays. and expand Model. In this case. and click Open. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and click Save Group.rvt. click Desktop. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click OK. click Modify. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Save. browse to the Desktop.

25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Use Existing. click Remove Link. click Modify. click Link. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. expand Revit Links. verify that Attached Details is selected only. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. 24 In the message dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.rvt. select the linked Revit model. and click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and the link is removed. click Training Files.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 17 On the Design Bar. When a group is converted to a link. click Bind. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog.

Site 19 In this tutorial. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and then modify the data. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. In the final exercises. You add property lines manually. and walkways. islands. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. convert the data to a table. you add a building pad to the site. 677 . Using Site Tools In this lesson.

678 | Chapter 19 Site . click Point. This project file was created using the default metric template. and open Metric\m_First_Project. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Site. click Toposurface. right-click in the Design Bar. click Training Files. The scale of this view is 1 : 100.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a toposurface using two different methods. In the second part of this exercise.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Using the first method. 3 On the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. and double-click Site. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.

6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

under Increment. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12000mm. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. enter 1500mm. and click OK. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle.8 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 15000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 12 On the Settings menu. under Additional Contours. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. click Site Settings. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. click Finish Surface.

14 On the View toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. click to delete it. 16 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and press ENTER. click to view it at various angles.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. (SteeringWheels). 18 In the Project Browser. click the elevation value. enter 1000mm. 19 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and double-click South. modify the level names and elevations. under Views (all). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). on the Standard toolbar. Before importing the contour data. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and.

28 On the Design Bar. rename the level Basement. click Yes. under Floor Plans. 23 Click the Level 1 text. under Views (all). Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. select Preserve. Verify that Current view only is not selected. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. and click OK. click Training Files. double-click Site. click Pin Position. Until it is exploded. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Modify. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . rename the level Base Site Elevation. Click Open. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. select Specify. For Layers. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog.21 Click the Level 2 text. 30 On the Edit menu. and press ENTER. 29 Select the imported topography. For Colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. and press ENTER. 24 In the Project Browser. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. it is considered an import symbol.

click Modify. clear C_INDX. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. select it. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 34 Under Visibility.31 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 36 On the Design Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. when the edges highlight. clear Elevations. and click OK. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you select the import symbol. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Visibility/Graphics. click Toposurface.

click Finish Surface.rvt. click (Default 3D View).The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click (SteeringWheels). Using the second method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 39 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 42 On the View toolbar. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. name the project Site-in progress. you add property lines using two methods. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 40 On the View toolbar. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Using the first method. and click Save. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Adding Property Lines In this exercise.

you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. click Lines. double-click Site. Site-in progress. On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Click Modify. click Property Line. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. do so before continuing. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Select and delete the right vertical line.rvt. select Create property lines by sketching. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration.

click 12 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select Edit Table. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. click OK. on the Standard toolbar. when they highlight. A warning dialog is displayed. to delete them. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. add an arc line on the right. and click OK. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Property Line. select the lines. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.

click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 19 In the Tags dialog. Adding Property Lines | 687 . The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. This means there is no gap in the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 15 Starting in Row #1. 16 Click OK. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. click to place the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. If the gap is not closed. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.

and click Drafting. click Tag ➤ By Category. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . In this exercise. In the final step. 27 On the Options Bar. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 25 Under Visibility.20 Click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 23 On the View menu. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click to place it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. In the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.dwg and click OK.rfa. you created two sets of property lines. 30 On the View Control Bar. clear Leader. this project file is required in its current state. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click the Imported Categories tab. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Training Files. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. The tags display more prominently in this view. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click Visibility/Graphics. Before adding property line segment tags.

9 In the Site Settings dialog. enter 1000. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Under Subcategory. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. for Subcategory. select Topography. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 10 Under Additional Contours. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Range Type. select Working Contour. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. enter the name Working Contour. click New. In the Object Styles dialog. Site-in progress. Under Line Color. select Single Value. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 7 Click OK.rvt. select Dash dot. 6 In the Object Styles dialog.0mm. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Under Line Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. and click OK.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. click Site Settings. select a shade of Brown. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . under Contour Line Display. click Object Styles.

such as material. In the next exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Working Contour. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . In this exercise.11 Click OK. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. parking areas. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. The next exercise requires a new training file. and islands. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.

click Subregion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Although the exact dimensions are not important. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. try to replicate the location and proportion.rvt. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . and open Metric\m_Site. click Lines. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Training Files. 2 On the Design Bar. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.

under Identity Data. and click to open the Materials dialog. select Site . enter Parking for Name. click Finish Sketch. click Properties. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click the value for Material.Tarmacadam for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.NOTE In the Metric training file. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar.9 On the View Control Bar. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. expand Schedules/Quantities. they display within this schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and double-click Topography Schedule. click Edit Boundary. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.Tarmacadam. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. As you create new subregions. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. under Floor Plans. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.

22 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. double-click Site. 16 On the Design Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. under Schedules/Quantities. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Lines.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . Notice that the project area has increased. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Within each subregion. In this training project. Delete overlapping lines. double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Subregion.

26 In the Materials dialog. enter Island . select Site . Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click to open the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Identity Data. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes.Grass for Name. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass for Name. 29 On the View Control Bar. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. click the value for Material. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 30 In the Project Browser. click Properties.23 In the upper-right parking area. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 28 On the Design Bar.

Name each region Island Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Floor Plans. You must sketch each region separately.walkway. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. Name the subregion Walkway. under Floor Plans.31 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . under Schedules/Quantities. click Lines. and apply the material Site .Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 32 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.

double-click Site. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. and click Save. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. When you use the grading tool. under Floor Plans. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 2 Select the toposurface. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. this project file is required in its current state.

5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. under Phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. A warning dialog is displayed. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. select Existing for Phase Created. Using Phasing on page 761. click (Element Properties). Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 8 Select the topographic surface. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. and click OK. and click Select and Edit. click Graded Region. click Modify. select Copy Internal Points. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. see the tutorial.3 On the Options Bar.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

Grading the Toposurface | 701 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and new.

702 | Chapter 19 Site . 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Point. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 17 On the Design Bar.13 Press DELETE. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click Finish Surface. click (Default 3D View). Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

you create a building pad. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. this project file is required in its current state. (SteeringWheels). Only the graded topography displays. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click View Properties. Therefore. and click OK. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. only the original toposurface displays. 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. specify Existing for Phase. under Phasing. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 24 On the View menu. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad on page 703.20 On the View toolbar. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. click View Properties. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. under Phasing. you can delete it. When you add a building pad. and click OK. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . click to view it at various angles. specify New Construction for Phase. and delete it.

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pad. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.rvt. under Floor Plans. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. NOTE By default. click Finish Sketch. If you have an existing building model. double-click Site. the Pick Walls command is active. Site tutorial-in progress. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . 6 On the Design Bar.

For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (Default 3D View). 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the View toolbar.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. this project file is required in its current state. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . Adding Site Components on page 706. Notice the new building pad. click (SteeringWheels). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.

5 On the Design Bar. click Parking Component. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify.90 deg. 3 In the Type Selector. Site tutorial-in progress. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Adding Site Components In this exercise. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. and select the parking space. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . under Floor Plans. double-click Site.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

9 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector. Notice the new parking spaces. choose any tree type. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

In the following illustration. click (SteeringWheels). 14 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View).13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 15 On the View toolbar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Adding Site Components | 709 .

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. under Floor Plans. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Apply. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 5 On the View menu. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. click Hidden Line. Site tutorial-in progress. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . 17 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. 8 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. outside of the site. In the following exercise. Click again to the left to position the leader. to position the shoulder of the leader. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar.

You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create a parking schedule.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

11 On the Window menu. and click Add. select Mark. under Floor Plans.rvt. click the Fields tab. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. enter Size. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Type. and under Heading. 8 Under Fields. 10 In the Project Browser. and under Heading. enter Space. under Views (all). select Type. Site tutorial-in progress. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 5 Under Available fields. double-click Site. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. If necessary. 9 On the Window menu. and click Add. select Mark. select Parking for Category. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. number the first three spaces consecutively. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 12 In the Site plan. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. The parking schedule is displayed. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 7 Under Fields. click Schedule/Quantities. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. under Space.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Space. 14 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .

716 .

In this tutorial. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. doors. and so on. select the desired workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. After the project is shared. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. called Worksharing. When you are working on a shared project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. you specify an active workset. stairs. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. The first time you activate worksets within a project. and click Editable. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Using Worksharing. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements specific to a view. A workset is a collection of building elements. however. you must first enable Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. go to the Worksets dialog. You can enable Worksharing for any project. 717 . floors. use Element Borrowing. such as walls. To make a workset editable. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. All other team members can view this workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project.

When setting up Worksharing. such as a tenant interior. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In the next exercise. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. In the lessons and exercises that follow. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. After learning the fundamentals. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. Instead. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In a multi-story structure. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application.

you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. You should have at least one workset for each person. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In most projects. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Team member roles Typically. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Experience has shown that. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. When creating the new worksets. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. and View worksets. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. On this tab. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. not including the Project Standards. When you create a new workset.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. designers work in teams. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. with each assigned a specific functional task. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. As new members create worksets for their own use. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Shared Levels and Grids. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. for a typical project. Regardless of the default setting.

Generally. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save locally (to your local file). no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. if a workset named Interior was created. you can select which workset is active. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. proceeds as usual. within the local file. However. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. the file is saved as the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. This is called “Selective Open. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. After saving to the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. When you save to the central file. When you save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should then save to your local file. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This makes them available to other team members. As you work. your changes are saved. your changes propagate to the entire team. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. however. On the Options Bar. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Therefore. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. For example. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you make that workset editable by you.

you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. save to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. if you know who checked out the required workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you should check out the Materials workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. and then save the local file. In this conceptual exercise. To do this. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you work no differently then you would in the office. Alternatively. reload the latest changes from the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. for instance. make any required worksets editable. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. In this situation. and make that workset editable. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In this instance. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. using VPN. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . When working remotely.

722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Your username displays as the present owner." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. under Show. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. The Worksets dialog displays. click Training Files. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. and notice all are editable by you. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names.In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.

and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click New. clear Visible by default in all views. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. select Workset1. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. ■ 5 Under Show. type the name Exterior Shell. and click OK. a small number of team members are working on the building model. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. and Views. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. and double-click Level 1. Project Standards. For example. 14 In the Worksets dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. expand Floor Plans. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". all building model elements are assigned to that workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Therefore. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 8 Click OK. 13 In the Rename dialog. clear Families. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. click OK. Only User-Created worksets should display. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. In this simple training project. For training purposes. In this training file. 12 Click Rename. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . You do. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. expand Views (all). a third team member is assigned furniture placement. In this case. imagine four users including yourself. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. it is better to make them visible by default. however. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 16 In the drawing area. you can rename the default workset. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. currently named Workset1. 9 Click New. When you initially activate Worksharing. Because the interior walls appear in many views.When you enable worksharing. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. another is assigned the interior layout. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently.

20 Select one of the interior walls. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 29 Click OK. under Identity Data. 21 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. stairs. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. and walls. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Interior Layout for Workset. click the Worksets tab. 19 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 23 Select all of the interior elements. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click . and click OK. click .17 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. including the interior doors. under Identity Data.

If any interior elements remain. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. and click OK. you enabled Worksharing on a project. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 43 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the File menu. 32 Select Interior Layout. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 33 In the Project Browser. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. under Identity Data. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 30 On the View menu. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 35 On the Options Bar. select all of the interior elements of the building model. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. select Interior Layout for Workset. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. Now that you have created the central file. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 38 In the Save As dialog. click the Worksets tab. 34 In the drawing area. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 39 Click Save. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click Non Editable. double-click Level 2. click Worksets. and click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . under Views (all). The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click Close. click Save As. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click . enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 41 In the Worksets dialog.

You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 12 Click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 15 In the Project Browser. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Interior Layout for Name.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 7 In the Save As dialog. check out worksets. and select Yes for Editable. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Before working on the model. and click Save. select Interior Layout. Next. expand Floor Plans. In this case. click Options. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. you create your local file. In addition. and select Specify. please do so before continuing. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. make modifications to the building model. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 13 On the Window menu. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. click Save As. 4 Click Open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. select the central file. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 2 In the Open dialog. expand Views (all). and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Open. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 6 On the File menu. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and click OK. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select all the User-Created worksets. and double-click Level 1.

click Modify. notice the Editable Only option. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. 21 On the Options Bar. If it was owned by another user. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 22 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . 19 In the Element Properties dialog. you can still edit this wall. If this is selected. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. however. 20 Under Constraints. click . On the Options Bar. In this case. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. click Worksets. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 24 Click OK. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. under Identity Data. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 23 On the File menu. click . select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In the Worksets dialog. Verify that it is cleared.

add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor.126mm Partition (2-hr). 29 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Door. click Wall. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 26 Delete the door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. The precise location is not important. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 34 In the Type Selector.

displays the workset as well as the element type. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. a tooltip. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. which matches the information in the Status Bar. You modified the building model. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. For training purposes. you should perform regular saves. it is recommended. Whenever you save. make elements editable. By default. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you have not yet completed these exercises. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and save locally immediately afterward. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Borrowed Elements is selected. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Save to Central. please do so before continuing. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. leave this file open in its current state. In addition. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this exercise. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. checked out worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. In this particular case. save to central.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. When working in your local file. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . each user must check out worksets. and reload the latest changes. you created your local file. Throughout the process. you should relinquish all worksets. At the end of a work session. 37 In the Save to Central dialog.

and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Options. This is a system setting. click Worksets. 3 On the Settings menu. 12 In the Save As dialog. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. click Save As. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click Save. select all the User-Created worksets. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. specifically sequenced. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. This file is for your use only. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You now have a local copy of the project. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Open. consider that person to be User 1. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click OK. and proceed to Creating a local copy. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 9 Click Open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. In the following section of this exercise. For training purposes. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). skip the following section. instructions are staggered. Regardless of which central file you choose to use.rvt. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. enter User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 15 On the File menu. click Options. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. under Username. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and click OK. 4 Click the General Tab and.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. User 2: Create a local file. In addition. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. one user has already created a local file. 11 On the File menu. return to the Settings dialog. and select Specify. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 7 In the Open dialog.

it becomes the active workset. open it now. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. User 1: Check out worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. If it is not open. modify the building model. expand Views (all). 17 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. select the lower exterior wall. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you only have one workset checked out. 27 On the File menu. 23 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. and select Yes for Editable. 19 On the File menu. click Worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.You are now the owner of that workset. click Save to Central.” 29 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.

click Save to Central. under Floor Plans. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Before adding any furniture. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click OK. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 35 Click OK. 37 On the File menu. click Worksets. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.” 39 Click OK. When you save to central. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. right-click Level 1. you should create a furniture plan view. 33 On the File menu. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 42 Select Furniture Layout. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. under Views (all). Click Yes. 46 In the Project Browser. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 43 In the Project Browser. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 41 On the File menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click Rename. 44 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Reload Latest. 45 In the Rename View dialog. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Save to Central.

59 In the Type Properties dialog. under Show. click the Worksets tab. select Project Standards. click Rename. click Save to Central. and click OK. 50 On the View menu. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 62 On the File menu. 53 On the File menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 48 In the Type Selector. 63 In the Worksets dialog. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. are placed under Project Standards. and click Element Properties. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 65 Click OK. click Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Exterior Wall . choose any desk. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Therefore. 60 In the Rename dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. such as Wall Types. click Reload Latest. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Modify. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Edit/New. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. and click OK. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. 49 On the Design Bar.200mm. the Visible by default option was not selected.” 55 Click OK. 61 Click OK 2 times.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Worksets. click Component. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. rather than Families. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 66 On the File menu. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. NOTE System families. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . and click inside any room. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Checking out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. click Options. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 71 In the Save to Central dialog. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. modified the building model. and save 69 On the File menu. select Save to Central. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. finished the previous workset exercises. In the final exercise of this tutorial. In subsequent steps. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 70 On the File menu. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Each user must have network access to the central file. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. As each of you work. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. This exercise requires two users and. select the following. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. User 1: Reload latest. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. 3 In the Save As dialog. you save the training file as a central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. There are specific instructions for each user. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. and still have your local files open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. and click OK. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and these problems are rectified. Each user checked out worksets. you need to set up your central and local files. and published their changes back to the central file. throughout this training. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. select Reload Latest. click Training Files. click Save As.

9 In the File Save Options dialog. 13 In the Open dialog. and select Specify. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Save As. return to the Settings dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click Save. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select the central file. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 8 In the Save As dialog. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. and click OK. Next. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. click Options. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu.4 In the File Save Options dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This is the local file for User 1. click Options. 12 On the File menu. 6 On the File menu. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. In addition. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . On the Settings menu. and click OK. The central file should still be open. 5 Click Save. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. Set the Username to User 2. 15 Click Open. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 17 On the File menu. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This is a system setting. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Open. click Save As. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK.

26 In the Worksets dialog. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and select Yes for Editable. After you submit the request. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 27 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the second window from the top. double-click Level 1. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Interior Layout. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 22 In the Worksets dialog. and select Yes for Editable. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select the Interior Layout workset. and then click OK. click Worksets. 29 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. select them. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and click Editing Requests. under Floor Plans. At this point. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 24 Under Active Workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Afterwards. and click Open. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 30 On the left exterior wall. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click Worksets. You are now the owner of that workset. click the File menu. select Exterior Shell. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization.

click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . and close 39 On the File menu. click Check Now. 38 Click OK. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. In this multi-user exercise. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. A message informs you that your request has been granted. In this case. 35 Click Grant. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and the other user granted it. to Local. you requested permission to edit the element. select the following. and click OK. and notice the window is in the new location. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 36 Click Close.

738 .

you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. 739 . you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. At any time in the design process. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options. For example. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. and each option set can have multiple schemes. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.

In the first exercise in this lesson. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. TIP In this exercise. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. click Training Files. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The client has asked you to create various options. With the second option. each with multiple design options. you design each of the structural options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. click New. you set up multiple design option sets. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise.In this particular case. 2 In the Design Options dialog. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .rvt. In the final exercise of this lesson. you can edit it. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). each is constructed for interchangeability. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. After you create a design option. In the second exercise. make your final design decision. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. therefore. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. under Option Set. the only available command is to create a new option set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. the roof and structure systems must work together. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.

select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. click Modify. and click Close. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. or add a dimension string between the columns. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 9 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP To center the middle column. 5 On the View menu. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Floor Plans. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click Column. 7 In the Type Selector. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. add three columns. 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. and the third column centered between the two. click Edit Selected. 11 On the Edit toolbar. click 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. expand Views (all). Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. By selecting Multiple. select: ■ ■ ■ . Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns.3 Select Option 1 (primary). either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click).

add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. they are difficult to see in this view. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. A copy of the three selected columns is added.14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 Zoom out and. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. In the following illustration. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click .

The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 19 In the Project Browser. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Use the following illustration as a guide. click Beam. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Modify. select Round Bar : 50mm. The first click specifies the beam start point. Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 21 In the Type Selector. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In it. you add the beams that span the columns.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . double-click TOP OF CORE. under Floor Plans. and click at its center to set the beam start point.

28 Zoom out. zoom into the left column. and click the center point. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . select: ■ ■ ■ . and select the center of the column to add a copy. 30 On the View toolbar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Rename. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). There should now be two roofing design options. not a new option set. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click New. enter Structure for New. 46 Under Option. click Rename. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. under Option Set. enter Brackets for New. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 32 In the Design Options dialog. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. click New. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. 43 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. name the option Louvers. enter Roofing for New. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option. click New. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 37 Select Option 2 and. 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. click Rename. 45 Under Roofing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . under Option Set.

746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click OK. it will resemble the following illustration. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 53 In the Project Browser. Under Now Editing. 51 Under Edit. click Rename. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 50 In the Design Options dialog. name the option Sunscreen. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. under Structure. 52 Click Close. under Floor Plans. select Beam. 48 Under Option. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names.47 Under Roofing. double-click ROOF TERRACE. you create the second design option. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Option 2. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. When finished.

Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Refer to the following illustration. select M_Roof Beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . click Component. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 62 Select the beam and. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. The second click represents the move end point. click Modify. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

70 On the File menu. click . 66 On the View toolbar. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. 68 In the Design Options dialog. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. m_Urban_House-in progress. 67 On the Tools menu. 69 Click Close. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Finish Editing. you need this file in its current state. click Save As. name the file. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. which is visible by default. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. and click Save. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 .

The second roofing system. 8 In the Type Selector. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion.rvt. 5 Click Close. In the next exercise. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. If you need to add dimensions. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. Under Now Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. click Edit Selected. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial.In this exercise. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 4 Under Edit. and double-click TOP OF CORE. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. Sunscreen. do so now. the other for beams. each with multiple design options to pick from. 3 In the Design Options dialog. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. click Component. you design each of the roofing options. select Louvers (primary). delete them after the rafter is in place. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The dimensions shown are for training purposes. With the second option. expand Floor Plans. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Tools menu. you set up multiple design option sets. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Roofing. 10 Referring to the following illustration. a Louver system. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. The first option. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. open it now. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options.

You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 15 On the Edit menu. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click . 16 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. Enter 5 for Number. click Array. under Other. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select 2nd for Move To. Select Constrain. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Modify. and click OK. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. enter 990. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. when the listening dimension displays.

20 In the Type Selector. under Other. click Modify. Select 2nd for Move To. and select the louver you just placed. 22 On the Design Bar. and click Array. Enter 34 for Number. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Select Constrain. 26 On the Options Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click Component. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Options Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. 25 With the louver still selected. click the Edit menu. 27 For the array starting point. and click OK.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

when the listening dimension displays. click . and. 29 On the View toolbar. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. and press Enter. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

under Roofing. Click OK. 33 Under Editing. click Lines. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Finish Editing. In this case. 34 In the Project Browser. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 39 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and double-click West. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. expand Elevations. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 40 On the Options Bar. select Sunscreen. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. and then click Close. click Edit Selected. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. under Edit. Therefore. 31 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. 30 On the Tools menu.

Select the right arc. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click Finish Sketch. 46 On the Tools menu. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Under Constraints. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. then you can modify it through the dimension. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. click Properties. The first two points define the ends of the line. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 49 On the View toolbar. the top of the next column on the right. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Trim/Extend. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. then the center arc. 48 On the Design Bar. and the third point defines the arc. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You will fix this in a later step. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 41 Select the top of the left column. click .

you need this file in its current state. and click Rename. In this exercise. secondary. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. click Finish Editing. expand 3D Views. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 52 On the File menu. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. and delete the discarded design options. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. click Save. under Views (all). do so now. you designed each of the roofing options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. After exploring the combinations. 51 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Managing Design Options In this exercise. you select a design. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. make it part of the building model. and click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and then click Close. The first option. Managing Design Options | 757 . right-click {3D}. 4 In the Project Browser. The second roofing system. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. 50 On the Tools menu. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under Edit. tertiary. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. under 3D Views. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Sunscreen. 3 In the Rename View dialog. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. enter Primary Option. and last options. and click OK. a Louver system.

758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic.5 Right-click each of the copies. under 3D Views. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Secondary Option. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. click the Design Options tab. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 9 Click OK. 7 On the View menu. and click OK. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Views (all). 11 On the View menu. double-click Primary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click Rename. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.

click the Design Options tab. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. double-click Tertiary Option. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In this case. under Views (all). 15 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Last Option. under 3D Views. under Views (all). and click OK. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. click the Design Options tab. Managing Design Options | 759 . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. At this point. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.14 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View menu. In your design options.

since you no longer need them. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Delete. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. An alert is displayed. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. under Structure. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Save. 23 In the Design Options dialog. The set is deleted. 35 On the File menu. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. select Make Primary. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. In this exercise. double-click Primary Option. click Close. click Yes.22 On the Tools menu. and deleted the discarded design options. 30 Under Option Set. 24 Under Option. 29 Select Roofing. 27 In the alert dialog. select Beam. 31 In the alert dialog. made it part of the building model. you selected a design. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. After exploring the combinations. click Accept Primary. 25 Select Structure. click Yes. This was the client choice for structural. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 26 Under Option Set. the current primaries are no longer options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Because the client has selected the design option. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations.

In the second exercise. In the second exercise. You create new phases. and then add new building model elements. This changes room definition and total building model area. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. 761 .Project Phasing 22 In any project. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. demolish existing walls and doors. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. then add new walls and doors in a different location. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. For the client. complete with schedules. In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing construction. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation.

If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. regardless of phase. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. 6 On the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Phasing. you do not need to change the project units to metric. go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. During the demolition and renovation process. click Modify. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Project Units. expand Views (all). Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. and None is selected for Phase Demolished.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. As you add new elements to the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.rvt. click (Element Properties). In the left pane of the Open dialog. are visible in this view. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. This means that all building model elements. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. If you wish to do so. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. click Training Files. under Phasing. When you create a new project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click Cancel. define the units. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. 7 Click Cancel. under Phasing. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

enter Level 1 . you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. click Modify. 17 Click No. After you release the mouse button. 16 In the Rename dialog.Demo. and click Rename. and click Rename. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. under Floor Plans. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties.Existing. 11 In the Filter dialog. After you create the views. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. clear Door Tags. 18 In the Project Browser. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. right-click Level 1 . Because this is a renovation project. including the door tags. enter Level 1 . click (Filter Selection). 10 On the Options Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. right-click Level 1. 12 On the Options Bar. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. right-click Copy of Level 1 . TIP If this were a multi-story building.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 20 In the Rename dialog.Existing. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. all of the building model elements. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Existing. and click OK. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Because this is a phase-specific view. are highlighted in red.Existing. under Phasing. Phasing Your Model | 763 . and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. for Phase Created. click . under Floor Plans.

24 In the Project Browser. Next. under Floor Plans. under New. under Floor Plans. Existing. Phase status is time-dependent. In this case. 26 In the Phasing dialog. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. There are five default phase filters. Later in this exercise.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. and Temporary. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . 29 For Composite Plan.Existing. On a logical time line. Demolished. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Level 1 . select Existing. Because of this time relationship. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . however. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. under Phasing. you modify these settings. to which all the building model elements belong.Demo. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. and click OK. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. click the Phase Filters tab. 21 In the Project Browser. You may need to zoom in to see this. 28 Under Filter Name. 27 Click New. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. enter Composite Plan. select Overridden. for Phase. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. new construction occurs after existing construction.

under Floor Plans. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. When you demolish the host. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.31 Under Phase Status. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 42 In the Project Browser. its display changes to a red dashed line. you demolish all elements hosted by it. select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. click the value for Color. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Phasing Your Model | 765 . click OK. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All.Existing. select red. select the line style. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Next. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 36 Using the same method. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. click (Demolish). under Cut ➤ Lines. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 32 In the Demolished row. double-click Level 1 .Demo. select a lighter blue. you begin demolition. under Floor Plans. As you click each wall. or you can use the demolish tool. There are two ways to demolish an element. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration.

Existing. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. select Show Previous + New. for Phase Filter. and click OK. 47 In the Type Selector.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. add a long horizontal wall. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. under Phasing. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . The demolished walls no longer display. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Door. and click OK. under Phasing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 51 Add a door leading into each room. click Wall. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 52 Open Level 1 . 49 On the Design Bar. for Phase Filter. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 50 In the Type Selector. 53 Open Level 1 .Demo. select Basic Wall: Interior .

new is shown in blue. right-click Level 1 . 57 In the Project Browser. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 62 If necessary.New. Phasing Your Model | 767 . regardless of phase. because the phase filter is set to Show All. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. All elements are displayed in this view. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Open Level 1 .The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. The renovated building model plan is displayed. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . which are displayed as red.New. click (Default 3D View). and existing shows as half-tone. 61 On the View Control Bar.Demo. 60 On the View toolbar.

Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. click Project Units. In this view. click Training Files. expand Views (all). therefore. In this view. All room boundaries are phase-specific. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 3 Open Level 1 . If you wish to do so.Demo. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. and click OK.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. demolition. If you wish to save this file. 2 Open Level 1 . In the next exercise. go to the Settings menu. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Notice that this view is the original building model. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. 63 Close the file. you can do so at this time. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.rvt. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and new construction.Existing. expand Floor Plans. define the units.New. You can also see that the room quantities. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. and double-click Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model. As the renovation process continues. the rooms change in both definition and size. sizes.

click Room. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In the Phasing dialog. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 11 On the Design Bar. 5 Click OK. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.New. yet they have different room numbers. 9 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. and maximize the view. Use the following illustration as a guide. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.Demo. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 13 Open Level 1 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 10 Open Level 1 . Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.Existing. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room. click Modify. click Room Tag. click in each room as you move to the right.

The two schedule views tile. 17 On the Window menu. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. View phase-specific room schedules. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Room Schedule .Existing. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 20 Close the file. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. In this exercise.New Construction. 18 Open Room Schedule . In this case. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. click Tile. In addition. 19 On the Window menu. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters.

In these situations. In this tutorial. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. Comparison of alternatives on a site. and manage the links throughout the project.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. performance. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. You position the building models on the site plan. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.

you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. and the other is a townhouse. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link two building models to the project. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. modify their visibility. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. You position the building models on the site.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.

This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. c_Townhouse. click Open. 2 On the File menu. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. this option will place the link at a predefined location. All three files now reside. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Manual . Auto . 5 On the File menu. select the three files. right-click. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Click Open. 8 Clear Read-only. c_Condo_Complex. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. in the Model Linking folder that you created. however.rvt. This option is grayed out.■ Auto .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Close. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . RELATED See the lesson. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. ■ ■ Manual . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save the file there. click Open. and click Properties. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. you can do so. 4 On the File menu.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Select c_Site. and open Common\c_Site. Otherwise. this system is not exposed to the user. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. click Training Files. and click OK.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. with write permission. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Save As.

12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.Origin to Origin. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Notice the blue detail lines.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. If you wish to do so. you can go to the Settings menu. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 11 On the File menu. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. 13 Click Open. select Auto . and make your changes. click Project Units. and double-click Level 1. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

Standard move commands work with linked building models. The linked model moves as one object. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. The first click specifies the move start point. click (Move). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex.rvt displays in the Type Selector. After you select it. The Move command requires two clicks.

and select c_Townhouse. select Auto . click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines.After you specify the location to move to. 18 On the View menu.Origin to Origin. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . For Positioning. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder.

24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. In this case. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 23 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. when the vertical line displays. you first specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. To rotate an object. click (Rotate).The townhouse building model displays above the site model. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise.

27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.

30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . and the second click specifies the copy-to point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy). The Copy command works much like the Move command. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point.

NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. click . 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click Rotate.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. under Identity data. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click (Default 3D View). 37 On the View toolbar. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 34 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Name. use the Move command to make any adjustments.

click and hold Orbit. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 .38 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. do so before continuing. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. When you originally linked the files. After linking the files. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click Save. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). they were placed too low within the site topography.

and double-click South. under Views (all). and then select the plane that you want to align. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. In the steps that follow. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and click to select the line. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and click OK. In this case. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. To do this. and click to select it.rvt. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. you first select the plane you want to align to. expand Elevations. When using the Align command.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 3 In the Project Browser. when it highlights. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. Click the Revit Links tab. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

under Elevations. 15 On the File menu. This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click and hold Orbit. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click (Default 3D View). Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click Save. (SteeringWheels). double-click North. click 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the View toolbar. 9 In the Project Browser. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 14 On the SteeringWheels.

then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. By linked view.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. When you link a file. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. click OK. 8 For Annotation Categories. 10 Click OK. under Elevations. click By Host View. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. display settings. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. detail level. In the next exercise. If the Basics page is set to Custom. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. do so before continuing. or Custom.rvt. and the halftone settings for each linked project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. click the Revit Links tab. click Custom. 2 On the View menu. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 9 Under Visibility. scroll down and clear Levels. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 4 Under Visibility. double-click South. expand c_Townhouse. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you need this project file open and in this view. If you have not completed the previous exercise. select <Custom>. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. As you can see. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. you can independently control the visibility settings. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views.

16 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. 20 For c_Townhouse. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select <Custom>. and click OK. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. With linked files. or fine. no detail level changes are required. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. click By Host View. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. expand c_Townhouse. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. You can click the value for Detail Level. under Display Settings. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . By selecting custom under Model Categories.rvt. on the Basics tab. click the Revit Links tab. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. By default. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then set the detail level to coarse. 24 Click OK. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 14 On the View menu. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Using the Custom option. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. select Custom. In this case. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. 23 In the Model categories list. double-click Level 1. medium.

In the next exercise. All other components are grayed out. In most cases. 26 Under Display Settings. With the Show All filter applied. However. under Visibility. In this case.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. click OK. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. demolished. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. click Save. there are situations. 29 Click OK. By default.rvt. click Custom for the Townhouse link. phase. this is preferable. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. existing. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. select c_Townhouse. 25 On the Revit Links tab. you manage the linked files. In this case. you need this project file open and in this view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. all new. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. on a sloped site for instance. and phase filter of a specific link. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In this exercise. 31 On the File menu.

They supply information regarding the links. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. In a shared coordinate environment. Notice the Loaded. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. select c_Condo_Complex. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 3 Under Path Type. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. and Saved Path fields are read only. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. The default path type is Relative. In general. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. click Yes. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. do so before continuing. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. click the Revit tab.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. the link is maintained. click Manage Links. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 4 Under Linked File.rvt. Locations Not Saved. 5 Click Unload. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 7 Click OK. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute.

link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. expand Revit Links. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .rvt. 9 On the File menu. the link is not loaded. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. To do this. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. click Save As. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. In these cases. In general. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. When you initially place the link. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. click the arrow next to the Open button. right-click c_Condo_Complex. and click Reload. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. If you choose not to open that workset. and select Specify. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. However.

Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. In essence. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. If you have not completed the previous lesson. In the next lesson. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. do so before continuing. When you share coordinates between projects. The host file consists primarily of site components. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When used in conjunction with model linking. name the file Site_Project. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. In this exercise.10 In the Save As dialog. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you are establishing a shared origin point. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. and the resulting project files. leave the project file open in its current view. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. and save it as an RVT file. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 .

It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. 2 On the Tools menu. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. click the Condo Complex. If you have not completed the lesson. do so before continuing. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. If you have closed the project. When you are working in the host project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. 3 In the drawing area.rvt and click Open. click Open. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. open it before continuing.coordinates are used. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. and the resulting project files. In this case. Linking Building Models on page 772. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select Site_Project.

but can have multiple additional locations. These three locations can be named Lot A.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Lot B. it is placed at a specific location. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. However. and Lot C. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. you need this project file open and in this view. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. select Location 1. In this exercise. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. click to select it. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. do so before continuing. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. On the Status Bar. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. when the edges highlight. 5 On the Design Bar. even though both models originate from one linked file. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercise. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design.

792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Not Shared for Shared Location. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. In the Choose Location dialog. 4 Under Value. and click OK. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. enter Lot A for New. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Move instance to. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. under Instance Parameters. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. This is a one-time operation. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 7 In the Rename dialog. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click Change. and click OK.2 On the Options Bar. . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. under Instance Parameters. click Not Shared for Shared Location. Record the current position as a location. click . click Rename. When constraining a link to a location. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click Reconcile. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use.

By relocating a project. or cancel the action. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you release the mouse button. 30 On the Tools menu. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. When you relocate a project. The first click specifies the move start point. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. and click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. click OK. and click OK. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 15 In the Choose Location dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. The second click specifies the move endpoint. To explicitly save a location. click Duplicate. and the left townhouse resides at that location. 26 Click OK. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. the active location position is moved. and click OK. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. Save locations 21 On the File menu. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. enter Lot B for Name. and then select the townhouse project. This is a two-click process. ignore the warning. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 23 Click Save Locations. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. a warning displays. Notice the OK button is still not active. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 19 In the Select Location dialog. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. Record current position as. 16 Click Change. make sure Lot B is selected. Because Lot A is currently in use. When you create a location. click the Revit tab. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. you cannot redefine its location. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. select the second option. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click Manage Links. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. select Save. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. click OK.

You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. you work in one of the linked projects. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. NOTE In the following exercise. 33 On the Edit menu. select Save.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and click OK. In this exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 36 On the File menu. 34 On the File menu. click Close.

In addition. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. 2 On the File menu. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Floor Plans.rvt file. In this exercise. Also. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. select Auto . click Open. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Because this building model only has one named location. If you have not completed the exercises. double-click 1st Floor. The current active location is Lot A. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. Select c_Townhouse and click Open.rvt file. Click Open. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Select c_Condo_Complex. When opening the linked file. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.By Shared Coordinates. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 .Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. it is placed automatically within the host project. if other models were linked into the same host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. For Positioning.

and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. In this exercise. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. you create a new location. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. select True North for Orientation. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. In the host file. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click View Properties. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you manage the shared locations. you need this project file open and in this view. click Manage Place and Locations. In this exercise. do so before continuing. In the next exercise. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. under Graphics. 6 Select Lot B. enter Lot C. orient a view to true north. click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. 7 Click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. you can select Lot C if necessary. and click Make Current. If you have not completed the exercises. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B.

rvt and click Open. You can save the file if you wish. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click Open. Select Site_Project. If you have not completed the exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. click Close. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 10 On the File menu. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. In this exercise. do so before continuing. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. On the Options Bar. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.

click Schedule/Quantities. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Fields tab. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. select Count. 5 Under Available fields. and click OK.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Doors. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog.

Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and click Properties. click Close. under Other. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. right-click Door Schedule. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 Select Grand totals. 13 On the File menu. You have completed this tutorial. In this exercise.8 Click OK. clear Itemize every instance. and then click OK twice. click Save. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Family and Type for Sort by. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 14 On the File menu.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

In the first lesson. selection default options. which is independent of the project settings. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. you create an office template. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture.rte. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 6 In the New Project dialog. click the Graphics tab. Finally. under Template file. journal cleanup options. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. In the second lesson. you modify the system environment. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. they are not saved to project files or template files.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. notification preferences. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 4 Under Colors. and your username when using worksets. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 803 . 8 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. select Invert background color. These settings control the graphics. click Browse. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and set it as your default template. and click OK. click Training Files. 3 In the Options dialog.

21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. 13 Click the General tab. clear Invert background color. click the Graphics tab. 11 Under Colors. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. the elements causing the error display using this color.10 In the Options dialog. and click OK. For Tooltip assistance. select red. select One hour. and open Metric\m_Settings. For Selection color. When an error occurs. click Modify.rvt. select None. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. However. 12 In the Color dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 22 When prompted to save changes. click Wall. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the value for Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 26 In the Options dialog. 14 Under Notifications. click No. select yellow. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select the wall. 19 On the Design Bar. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 15 Click OK.

enter the name you want to use during worksharing. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . If prompted. These files are used in the software support process. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 7 In the Options dialog. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. do not save the changes. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 3 Under Default template file.27 Click the General tab. and click Browse to select a template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. select the folder to save your files to by default. click the File Locations tab. select your preferred Save reminder interval. notice the list of library names. click Places. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 In the Places dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. For Tooltip assistance. Under Username. you can start a new project with that template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. and click Open. family template files. select Normal. Your login name displays by default. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. under Default path for family template files. 8 Click Cancel. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. However. click Browse. click Browse. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. and family libraries. you specify default file locations. centralized. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. including your default project template. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. TIP To view a template. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. 4 Click Cancel. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. such as in a large. Under Journal File Cleanup. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. click Browse. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days).

under Libraries. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. saving. Load. and select it as the library path. or families. templates. and click Open. and you can create new libraries. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Save. 11 In the Places dialog.library names and path. click (Add Value). In the following illustration. or loading a Revit Architecture file. and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. and click the icon side of the field.

enter sheetmtl-Cu. Save. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . such as bump maps. click Edit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 21 Click the File Locations tab. specify the new location here. 15 Under Library Name. and decal image files. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. and click OK twice. 28 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 2 In the Options dialog. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. custom color files. click the Spelling tab. Load. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. (Remove Value) to delete the library. If you want to relocate this path. 23 Select My Library. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click My Library. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 3 Under Settings. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 5 In the text editor. view the current path. 19 Click Cancel. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and Import dialogs. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. click Edit. If you work in a large office. 22 Click Places. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click the My Library icon. This path is determined during installation. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture.

Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. If prompted. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap settings. click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. you modify snap increments. do not save the changes. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the Options dialog. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click OK. click OK. You can turn snap settings on and off.11 In the Options dialog. click Modify. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click the Spelling tab. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. under Template file. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click Text. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Training Files. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. 18 In the Options dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the text editor. click Edit. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. delete sheetmtl-CU. 19 Under Settings. click Browse. In this exercise. 21 In the text editor. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click default template. 4 In the New Project dialog. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 12 On the Standard toolbar.

7 Under Object Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse. such as ZO to zoom out. For example. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.6 Under Dimension Snaps.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and enter 500 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. TIP To zoom while sketching. and move the cursor to the right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. While sketching. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . click OK. click Wall. If it does not. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 10 On the Options Bar. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If you do not have a wheel button. clear Chain. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom out until it does so.

and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. the midpoint. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 18 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. and delete the value 500 . Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. click Modify. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and do not save the file. and the wall edges. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Click OK. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and click Wall.. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. This is the increment that you added previously. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm.

you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. you render a region to observe the changes. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lines. annotations. and object styles. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. In the steps that follow. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Using these options.rvt. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Finally.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. You create and modify materials. When you apply a material to an element. fill patterns. save the project file with a unique name. and open Metric\m_Settings. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.

Fieldstone. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. In the Materials dialog. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. and select Masonry . and click (Element Properties). the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. enter Masonry . Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and click OK. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. for Class. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 3 Click (Duplicate). Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. However. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Masonry . and double-click 02 Entry Level. These details will display in rendered images.Stone. and click OK. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 11 Click OK. When a model element is loaded into a project. scale.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and texture of the material. The Render Appearance Library is a local. In the steps that follow. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 8 Select Riverstone Blue. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Fieldstone.Fieldstone material. 9 Click Apply. select Stone. When you change properties of a render appearance. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. read-only library for render appearances. In the next exercise. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 6 Click Replace. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The properties describe the color. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.

select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. . click Model Graphics Style. 15 Click Duplicate. 23 While pressing CTRL. select the rear exterior wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 19 On the right side of the Material field. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Brick. and click OK. 18 For Finish 1. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 26 On the View Control Bar. 24 In the Type Selector. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.14 In the Element Properties dialog. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . 21 Click OK three times. 17 For Structure. click This is the material that you created. click (Default 3D View). select Masonry .Fieldstone. click Edit. 25 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . click in the Material field. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 16 Enter the new wall name.

814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. click Rendering Dialog. under Quality. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. click Render. 31 In the Rendering dialog. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 32 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. for Setting. select Low or Medium. and click Rendering. right-click the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. The rendering process begins. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the 3D view. When finished. select Region. select the render region (a red rectangle). Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. 28 In the Rendering dialog. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. In the following exercise.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. and clear Region. choose Model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. click Import. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog.rvt. in the Rendering dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Then click Render again. 7 Under Custom. Drafting pattern density is fixed. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. such as steel. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Show the model. Zoom into the model. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. select Custom. expand Elevations. 3 Under Pattern Type. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. click Show the model. 5 Click New. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . 33 In the Rendering dialog. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and double-click West. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.

22 Click OK three times. 10 For Name. click to select a fill pattern. select Model. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. In the Materials dialog. for Finish 1. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 21 In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone material. 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. click OK. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click in the Material field.Fieldstone. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. enter Fieldstone. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.pat. click Edit/New. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK. (Element Properties). and click OK. enter . 9 Under Custom. 11 Click OK.56. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. select fldstn. click Modify. click Edit. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. under Pattern Type. click 15 For Structure. 18 Under Surface Pattern. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and for Import scale.

Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.rvt. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. there are often multiple window types within a project. TIP If the pattern does not display. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you.25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3 Windows. you can set the window frame material to By Category. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. click (Default 3D View). Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 2 On the keyboard. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. For example.

click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. click By Category. and click 15 Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value column. click (Element Properties). This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 10 Select the arched window. for Trim Exterior Material. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value column. 14 In the Materials dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray.3 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). 9 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. . click Edit/New. for Trim Exterior Material. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. and click .

the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. select Paint. select Trim. When you render a 3D view. enter Trim . 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 28 Under Shading. 19 For Trim. descriptions. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. or keywords include the word red. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 29 In the Materials dialog. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. (Duplicate). 23 Click Replace. for Class. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. click OK. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 25 In the search field. for Name. expand Windows. click in the Material column. click OK.red paint. and click OK. and select Trim. type red. Controlling Object Styles | 819 .

3 In the Line Patterns dialog. (Default 3D view). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. is open with the 3D view active. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. select Red. under Category. 7 On the View Control Bar. select Roofs. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Now that you have created a line pattern.31 On the View toolbar. 11 For Line Pattern.rvt. enter Roof Line. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Roof Line. click New. m_Settings-in progress. for Name. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. m_Settings-in progress. 10 For Line Color. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

12 Click OK. but not the line pattern. click Model Graphics Style. 14 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. under 3D Views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . Notice that the line color displays in this view. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. double-click to Building. 13 In the Project Browser.

select Blue. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Roofs. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Solid. elevations. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. under Floor Plans. click Override. 18 For Line Color. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. 15 In the Project Browser.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. double-click 03 Roof. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Black. 20 Click OK. select 5. select Roof Line. under Category. For Pattern. 19 For Line Pattern. select Roofs. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. for Visibility. 22 On the Model Categories tab. sections. For Color. Plans.

select Zoning Setback. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Level: 02 Entry Level. click Lines. 29 For Name. under Modify Subcategories. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. enter Zoning Setback. 34 On the Options Bar. and click OK. For Line Color. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. double-click Site.25 Click OK twice. 31 Click OK. under Floor Plans. select Red. (Line). 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 2. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. This places the line above the topography. 33 In the Type Selector. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. select Double dash. Click Click (Draw). For Line Pattern. click New. specify the following: ■ For Plane. Notice the site topography and the property lines.

46 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select it. and clear Property Lines. Expand Site. and clear Zoning Setback. 44 On the View toolbar. 43 Click OK. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. expand Lines. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If Site is not selected. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. (Default 3D View). and clear Zoning Setback. 40 In the Project Browser. 39 Click OK. 38 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. click (Default 3D View). This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. and then clear Property Lines. 36 On the View toolbar. double-click 02 Entry Level.

and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. click the default value. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Imperial and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Enter the name Linear . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Duplicate. click Modify. m_Settings-in progress. select Feet and fractional inches. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. 5 Under Text. For Units. m_Settings-in progress.rvt.Imperial. and then click outside the second wall. (Undo). Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Standard toolbar. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click Dimension. and place a dimension on the floor plan. double-click 02 Entry Level.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Modifying Annotations | 825 . click one wall. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. for Units Format. You have created a new dimension style. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.rvt. 7 Click OK twice. click another wall. 9 In the Type Selector. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. To place a dimension. select Linear .

click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. 19 Click Load. select the 3 window tags. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the steps that follow. 24 While pressing CTRL. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 22 Under Loaded Tags.Number. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. In the preview image.rfa. 16 Click Cancel. notice that the label displays 1i. click the bottom window. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 23 Click OK. under Category. click M_Window Tag . click Training Files. 18 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Tags dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.Number is now the assigned tag. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click (Element Properties). 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Number as the assigned tag. scroll down to Windows. Leave M_Window Tag . A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 26 On the Options Bar. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 27 On the west wall. 28 On the Design Bar. Then press Delete.14 On the Options Bar. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.Number.

30 Under Leader. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. and Detail Level Options | 827 . 2 In the Project Units dialog. Unless overridden. In the first section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Unless overridden. select meters squared. click Modify. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. dimensions use these project settings. the other displays the instance value. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and click OK. Temporary Dimensions. 8 Under Walls. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Click OK. M_Window Tag . Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.Temporary Dimensions. for Rounding. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. for Area. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. notice Window Tags appears twice. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. and Detail Level Options on page 827. you specify the project units of measurements. select To the nearest 100. 3 In the Format dialog. 6 Click OK. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. for Length. 9 Under Doors and Windows. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the default value. Specifying Units of Measurement. 31 On the Design Bar. In the second section. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement.Number. you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the final section. m_Settings-in progress. For Unit symbol. and click OK. click the default value.rvt.Temporary Dimensions. you modify the detail level assignments. (Default 3D View). Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.Under Category. select Faces. dimension values display using this setting. select 0 decimal places. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. Specifying Units of Measurement. select Openings. verify that Create is clear. 32 On the View toolbar.

Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In the left pane of the Open dialog. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls.rvt. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. and expand 3D Views. click .In this project. In this exercise. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In this table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You do not select a view scale to move it. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. click Training Files. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. expand Views (all). 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. expand Floor Plans. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 12 Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . select Discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. expand each view type. and click Apply. select Type/Discipline. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that views are grouped by phase. In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 5 On the Views tab. 8 Select Phase.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand Sheets (all). and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and click OK.

Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click OK. click the Folders tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. under Sheets. 16 Click the Views tab. expand each sheet set. and click New. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline.

you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. levels. If you want to save this file. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In the lesson that follows. You can also save these settings in a template file. enter a unique file name. expand Complete. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and view names. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. For example. you select the starting point for your office template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. View Type (Family and Type). 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. Creating an Office Template | 831 . and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click OK. when you create a new project. Creating an Office Template on page 831. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Whenever you create a new project or template. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. the same rules apply. 21 In the Project Browser. You can choose from several templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and Discipline. dimensions styles. In this lesson.rte template. When you create new projects. Proceed to the next lesson. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. In that case. under Views. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. expand 3D Views. you create an office template. navigate to your preferred directory. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. click Browse. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and open Metric\Templates. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. click Training Files. and click Open. 2 Under Template file.

7 In the Project Browser. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. 14 Click Open. and click OK. close them. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 15 Under Create new. 12 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. When you create the material. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. weights. for Create new. 9 In the Project Browser. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.5 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the project settings for your new template. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 6 Click OK. you can select it now. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. 13 Select the default template. and double-click North. select Project template. If you have additional projects open. select Project. For example. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. in the drawing area.

create new subcategories. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. and change render appearance properties. annotation objects. rotate. including color. If you change render appearance properties. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. For more details on modifying these settings. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. For more information. line colors. texture. 13 If necessary. You do this by defining the render appearance. and similar attributes. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. you can set line weights. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. line patterns. see a preview of the rendered material. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. the changes are saved as part of the project template.During this exercise. see the previous lesson. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. or refer to the online help. 2 Scroll down the materials list. Modifying System Settings on page 803. transparency. TIP For more information about creating new materials. or modify existing patterns. or refer to the online help. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You can align. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and materials for model objects. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and imported objects. create and modify them as needed. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 4 Click Replace. In the Object Styles dialog. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. and move model patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. Observe the materials that are already defined. When you create or modify a material. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. 9 Click OK when finished. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . specific modifications are not dictated. 11 Click the Model Objects tab.

37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. select it. 20 Click OK. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 34 Click OK. and dimensions. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. select it from this list. line color. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 19 If necessary. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 For existing line categories. or line pattern as needed. and specify the properties. 32 To modify a line pattern. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 29 Click OK. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and click Edit. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. create new line subcategories. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes.15 Modify categories. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. You can add and delete view scales. such as section lines and dimension lines. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. tags. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. click Duplicate. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. modify the line weight. and create new subcategories as needed. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab.

you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 61 Under Doors and Windows. angular. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 60 Under Walls. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 55 Click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . click Load.40 Click OK. Volume. name the style. and specify the properties. 57 Specify the Slope option. Linear. and radial dimensions are modified separately. In the Tags dialog. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. For example. 62 Click OK. and choose a decimal symbol. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 53 For Length. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 58 Click OK. 46 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. and Angle settings. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. click Format. TIP In the drawing area. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. To see the details of a particular style. select it from this list. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click OK. click Duplicate. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. specify the default location for temporary dimensions.

or edit existing organization types. click the arrows between columns. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Views tab. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 70 Click the Sheets tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Although these settings can be saved within a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 64 Review the table. Use the table below as a checklist. 73 Click OK. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 65 Click OK. 69 If necessary. See Setting up If necessary. create new browser organization types. rename. 68 Delete. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. You can find additional information in Help. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. and move view scales as needed. Each command is available on the Settings menu. To move the view scales. or edit existing organization types. In a typical project. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Using the arrows between the columns. Links to associated tutorials are provided. For example. 72 If necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. The detail level is based on view scale. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. rename. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. However. In such a case. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. When you create a new view. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 71 Delete. create new browser organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. or Fine. Medium. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template.

Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. do so before starting this exercise.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. or electrical fixtures. click Door. If you have not completed the previous exercise. furniture. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. or add to this selection. Depending on the intended use of this template. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. If necessary. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. phase filters. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you can set the default contour line interval. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. and electrical fixtures. you can set up the phases. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. You can load any family or group into a template. However. For example. 2 In the Type Selector. modify. If this selection is satisfactory. For example. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. title blocks. and the poche depth. Although this is possible. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. you do both. Although the options are endless. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. or use the Project Browser. the section cut material. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. there are some important thoughts to consider. you can move onto the next component type. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you may want to delete. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. if you load every available window type. you could load detail components. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. In the steps that follow. In addition. notice the list of doors already loaded. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template.

In the Element Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Bar. click Load. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. and click OK. Notice that each family category is listed. and click Open. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. or load a new door type. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. Click Duplicate. Select it. or modify a door.3 To modify. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. create. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Modify type properties. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog. create. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Enter a name. and click OK. and click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. expand Families. Make modifications.

View Range. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Detail Level. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. To do so. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In addition. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. To load a title block. In this exercise. 13 Click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. you created new projects using different templates. click 12 Click Preview. This title block is currently part of the template. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. click Load. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. load. Discipline. In addition. and select the title block type. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and click Delete. (Element Properties). Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. create. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance.) 10 Expand the title block. you create the views required for your template. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps.

double-click South. After applying the template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. 6 Click OK. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Apply. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. At any time.settings of categories and subcategories. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. you will first modify view templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. you can apply a view template to any view. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 15 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. and click OK. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 Under Names. the view is not linked to the template in any way. and apply the appropriate template. double-click Site. double-click Level 2. select Site Plan. 11 Click Apply. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 4 If necessary. In addition. click Apply. and click OK. under Elevations. select Architectural Plan. Every time a new plan view is created. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. open the view from the Project Browser. and then click OK. 12 In the Project Browser.

32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click the view name. To orient the 3D view to another view. and select the desired view. select Make Plan View. in the Project Browser. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. (Default 3D View). and click Properties. 23 To add more levels to the template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. under Floor Plans. use the ViewCube. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. or delete them as needed. and click Rename. 20 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. ceiling plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. By default. Rename. 21 In the Project Browser. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Orient to View. duplicate. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. right-click Level 1. review the floor plans. under 3D Views. 27 Create additional levels as needed. If you want to modify view properties. right-click {3D}. right-click the ViewCube. in the shortcut menu. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view.Notice the level names. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. and click Save View. review the existing floor plans. on the View toolbar. 30 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. If prompted. expand 3D Views. 31 Rename the 3D View. Blue level heads have associated plan views. a face. and select the desired direction. right-click the ViewCube. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. Black level heads have no associated views. under Floor Plans. click Level. click 29 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to a direction. and elevations. or delete this view. enter a view name. duplicate. notice that you have the option to rename. If it does not display. click Orient to a Direction. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and. right-click the ViewCube. click Schedule/Quantities. or an edge of the ViewCube.

and click Rename. and click OK. 40 To add views to the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Select a view. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click Add View to Sheet.You can add schedules to a template. assign filters.txt for AutoCAD. and click OK. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. modify settings as needed. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. or exportlayersdgn. You can still add views to the sheet. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . on the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block.txt for MicroStation). To do so. select the title block and delete it. After the sheet is created. and click OK. modify settings as needed. click Sheet. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. select and order required fields. You are prompted to select a title block. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. click Add View. On the Formatting tab. and modify their properties accordingly. On the Filter tab. Right-click the sheet name. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. select one. 42 Create new sheets as needed. select the default title block. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select the category type. in the Project Browser. To later add a title block to a sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. On the Appearance tab. modify settings as needed. 37 Click OK. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

and click Save. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. name the file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 2 For each category. select Save As. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and click Save. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. 8 In the dialog. 5 For each category.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. for example. 9 Click Save As. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. name the file. and so on. Using shared parameters. doors. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. You can save these mappings to a text file. project parameters. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and they become the set mappings for the project. These settings are retained within the project template. They cannot be shared with other projects. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. therefore. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When you create a multi-category schedule. For example. windows. click Save As. When scheduling. and so on.

2 Click Create. 3 Name and save the file. If a file already exists. 16 Under Parameter Data. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. and specify its discipline and type. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select a group to add parameters to. click New. select a parameter discipline type. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. click New. and click OK. and select Shared Parameter. For each parameter group. click Add. select Project parameter. under Groups.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. because each office has a unique set of needs. If this template will be used by multiple team members. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 9 Name the parameter. 26 Click OK. 24 To add a shared project parameter. 11 For each parameter group. 21 Under Categories. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. add required parameters. project parameters. 17 Under Discipline. 8 Under Parameters. 10 Click OK. and choose a shared parameter. 14 Click Add. 6 Create as many groups as needed. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 25 Click Select. select a parameter value type. 19 Under Group parameter under. 22 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. enter a parameter name. 5 Enter the group name. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. you can create a list of parameters. for Name. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you may want to save the file to a network location.

for Name. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and click Open. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 4 Modify the printer settings. make minor modifications if necessary. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 6 In the New dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and the percent of actual size. For each printer. 5 Click Save As. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. click Setup. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Click OK. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Under Settings. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 32 Navigate to the directory. 28 Click OK. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . select a printer for which you want to create named settings. or refer to the online help. enter a name for the schedule. By creating named settings within the template. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. click OK. For information on creating multi-category tags. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select the tag. 34 For Category. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 35 For Name. you can load them into the template. select Multi-Category. By going first to the Print command. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you create named print settings. In this exercise. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. you need only select a setting. and print. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. The tag is now part of the template. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 2 Under Printer. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and make it your default template file. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. paper placement. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click OK. save the file as a template. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor.

23 For Default template file. select Template Files (*. modify the printer settings. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and click Open. In addition. and create new settings for this printer. you ensure that office standards are maintained. select it. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 18 Click Browse. and click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. loaded components. If you have a project. In this lesson. 20 Click OK. you modified settings. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Name the template. and click Open. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 14 Under Save as type. enter a new name for the printer. 9 In the Print dialog.rte). In addition. click Browse. and saved them to a template. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Your template is complete. and click Save. save it in a network location. 25 Click OK. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can provide a good starting point for a template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 24 Navigate to the template location. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. You can also set this template as your default template. If you need to share this file with others. By investing the time to individualize your template. The only remaining task is to save it. click Save as. select a different printer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 19 Select the template. Create additional settings as needed. 11 Click Close when finished. click Setup.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful